|
290
|
1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
|
|
2 % $Id: texinfo.tex,v 1.5 1998/06/13 04:28:12 steve Exp $
|
|
|
3 %
|
|
|
4 % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98
|
|
|
5 % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
|
6 %
|
|
|
7 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
|
|
8 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
|
|
9 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
|
|
|
10 % your option) any later version.
|
|
|
11 %
|
|
|
12 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
|
|
13 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
|
|
14 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
|
|
15 % General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
16 %
|
|
|
17 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
|
18 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
|
|
|
19 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
|
|
|
20 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
|
|
|
21 %
|
|
|
22 % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
|
|
|
23 % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
|
|
|
24 % what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
|
|
|
25 %
|
|
|
26 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
|
|
27 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
|
|
28 % ftp://ftp.cs.umb.edu/pub/tex/texinfo.tex
|
|
|
29 % /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
|
|
|
30 %
|
|
|
31 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.
|
|
|
32 % Please include a precise test case in each bug report,
|
|
|
33 % including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem.
|
|
|
34 %
|
|
|
35 % Texinfo macros (with @macro) are *not* supported by texinfo.tex. You
|
|
|
36 % have to run makeinfo -E to expand macros first; the texi2dvi script
|
|
|
37 % does this.
|
|
0
|
38
|
|
|
39
|
|
|
40 % Make it possible to create a .fmt file just by loading this file:
|
|
|
41 % if the underlying format is not loaded, start by loading it now.
|
|
|
42 % Added by gildea November 1993.
|
|
|
43 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
|
|
44
|
|
|
45 % This automatically updates the version number based on RCS.
|
|
|
46 \def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}}
|
|
290
|
47 \deftexinfoversion$Revision: 1.5 $
|
|
0
|
48 \message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:}
|
|
|
49
|
|
|
50 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
|
|
51 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
|
|
52 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
|
|
53 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{}
|
|
|
54 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
|
|
55
|
|
|
56 % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
|
|
|
57
|
|
108
|
58 \let\ptexb=\b
|
|
|
59 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
|
|
60 \let\ptexc=\c
|
|
|
61 \let\ptexcomma=\,
|
|
|
62 \let\ptexdot=\.
|
|
|
63 \let\ptexdots=\dots
|
|
|
64 \let\ptexend=\end
|
|
290
|
65 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
|
|
66 \let\ptexexclam=\!
|
|
108
|
67 \let\ptexi=\i
|
|
0
|
68 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
|
|
69 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
|
|
70 \let\ptexstar=\*
|
|
|
71 \let\ptext=\t
|
|
|
72
|
|
|
73 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
|
|
74 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
|
|
75 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
|
|
76 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
|
|
77 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
|
|
78 {\catcode`@ = 11
|
|
108
|
79 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
|
|
80 % if the definition is written into an index file.
|
|
|
81 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
|
|
82 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
|
0
|
83 }
|
|
30
|
84
|
|
108
|
85
|
|
0
|
86 \message{Basics,}
|
|
|
87 \chardef\other=12
|
|
|
88
|
|
|
89 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
|
|
90 % starts a new line in the output.
|
|
|
91 \newlinechar = `^^J
|
|
|
92
|
|
|
93 % Set up fixed words for English.
|
|
|
94 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi%
|
|
|
95 \def\putwordInfo{Info}%
|
|
|
96 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi%
|
|
|
97 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi%
|
|
|
98 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi%
|
|
|
99 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi%
|
|
|
100 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi%
|
|
|
101 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi%
|
|
|
102 \ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi%
|
|
|
103 \ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi%
|
|
|
104 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi%
|
|
|
105
|
|
|
106 % Ignore a token.
|
|
|
107 %
|
|
|
108 \def\gobble#1{}
|
|
|
109
|
|
|
110 \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
|
|
|
111 \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
|
|
|
112 \hyphenation{eshell}
|
|
175
|
113 \hyphenation{white-space}
|
|
0
|
114
|
|
|
115 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
|
175
|
116 \newdimen \bindingoffset
|
|
|
117 \newdimen \normaloffset
|
|
0
|
118 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
|
|
119
|
|
|
120 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
|
|
121 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
|
|
122 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
|
|
|
123 %
|
|
|
124 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
|
|
125 \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
|
|
|
126 \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
|
|
127 \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
|
|
128 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
|
|
129 }%
|
|
|
130
|
|
175
|
131 % For @cropmarks command.
|
|
|
132 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
|
|
133 %
|
|
|
134 \newif\ifcropmarks
|
|
|
135 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
|
0
|
136 %
|
|
175
|
137 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
|
|
138 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
|
0
|
139 %
|
|
|
140 \newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick
|
|
175
|
141 \newdimen\topandbottommargin
|
|
|
142 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize
|
|
108
|
143 \cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks
|
|
0
|
144 \outerhsize=7in
|
|
|
145 %\outervsize=9.5in
|
|
|
146 % Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in
|
|
|
147 \outervsize=9.25in
|
|
|
148 \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
|
175
|
149
|
|
|
150 % Main output routine.
|
|
|
151 \chardef\PAGE = 255
|
|
|
152 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
|
|
153
|
|
|
154 \newbox\headlinebox
|
|
|
155 \newbox\footlinebox
|
|
0
|
156
|
|
|
157 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
|
108
|
158 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
|
|
159 \def\onepageout#1{%
|
|
175
|
160 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
|
|
161 %
|
|
108
|
162 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
|
|
163 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
|
175
|
164 %
|
|
|
165 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
|
|
166 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
|
|
167 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
|
|
168 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
|
|
169 %
|
|
108
|
170 {%
|
|
175
|
171 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
|
|
172 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
|
|
173 % before the \shipout runs.
|
|
|
174 %
|
|
|
175 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
|
|
176 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
|
|
177 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
|
|
178 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
|
108
|
179 \shipout\vbox{%
|
|
175
|
180 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
|
|
181 \hsize = \outerhsize
|
|
|
182 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
|
|
183 \nointerlineskip
|
|
|
184 \line{%
|
|
|
185 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|
|
186 \hfill
|
|
|
187 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|
|
188 }%
|
|
|
189 \vskip\topandbottommargin
|
|
|
190 \line\bgroup
|
|
|
191 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
|
|
192 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
|
|
193 \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
194 \fi
|
|
|
195 %
|
|
|
196 \unvbox\headlinebox
|
|
108
|
197 \pagebody{#1}%
|
|
175
|
198 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
|
|
199 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
|
|
200 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
|
|
|
201 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
|
|
202 \vskip 2\baselineskip
|
|
|
203 \unvbox\footlinebox
|
|
|
204 \fi
|
|
|
205 %
|
|
|
206 \ifcropmarks
|
|
|
207 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
208 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
|
|
209 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
|
|
210 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
|
|
211 \line{%
|
|
|
212 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|
|
213 \hfill
|
|
|
214 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|
|
215 }%
|
|
|
216 \nointerlineskip
|
|
|
217 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
|
|
218 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
|
|
219 \fi
|
|
|
220 }% end of \shipout\vbox
|
|
|
221 }% end of group with \turnoffactive
|
|
108
|
222 \advancepageno
|
|
|
223 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
|
|
224 }
|
|
70
|
225
|
|
0
|
226 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
|
|
227
|
|
|
228 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
|
|
229 {\catcode`\@ =11
|
|
|
230 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
|
|
231 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
|
|
232 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
|
|
233 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
|
|
234 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
|
|
|
235 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
|
|
236 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
|
|
237 }
|
|
|
238
|
|
|
239 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
|
|
240 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
|
|
241 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
|
|
242 %
|
|
|
243 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
|
|
244 \def\nstop{\vbox
|
|
|
245 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
|
|
246 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
|
|
247 \def\nsbot{\vbox
|
|
|
248 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
|
|
249
|
|
|
250 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
|
|
251 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
|
|
252 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
|
|
253 %
|
|
|
254 \def\parsearg#1{%
|
|
|
255 \let\next = #1%
|
|
|
256 \begingroup
|
|
|
257 \obeylines
|
|
|
258 \futurelet\temp\parseargx
|
|
|
259 }
|
|
|
260
|
|
|
261 % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
|
|
|
262 % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
|
|
|
263 \def\parseargx{%
|
|
|
264 % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
|
|
|
265 \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
|
|
|
266 \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
|
|
|
267 \else
|
|
|
268 \expandafter\parseargline
|
|
|
269 \fi
|
|
|
270 }
|
|
|
271
|
|
|
272 % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
|
|
|
273 {\obeyspaces %
|
|
|
274 \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
|
|
|
275
|
|
|
276 {\obeylines %
|
|
|
277 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
|
|
278 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
|
|
279 %
|
|
|
280 % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
|
|
|
281 % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
|
|
|
282 \argremovec #1\c\relax %
|
|
|
283 \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
|
|
|
284 %
|
|
|
285 % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
|
|
|
286 \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
287 }%
|
|
|
288 }
|
|
|
289
|
|
|
290 % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
|
|
|
291 % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
|
|
|
292 % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
|
|
|
293 % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
|
|
|
294 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
|
|
295 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
|
|
296
|
|
|
297 % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
|
|
|
298 % @end itemize @c foo
|
|
|
299 % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
|
|
|
300 % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
|
|
|
301 % result to \toks0.
|
|
|
302 %
|
|
|
303 % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
|
|
|
304 % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
|
|
|
305 % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
|
|
|
306 % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
|
|
|
307 % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
|
|
|
308 % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
|
|
|
309 % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
|
|
|
310 %
|
|
|
311 \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
|
|
|
312 \begingroup
|
|
|
313 \ignoreactivespaces
|
|
|
314 \edef\temp{#1}%
|
|
|
315 \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
|
|
|
316 \endgroup
|
|
|
317 }
|
|
|
318
|
|
|
319 % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
|
|
|
320 %
|
|
|
321 \begingroup
|
|
|
322 \obeyspaces
|
|
|
323 \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
|
|
|
324 \endgroup
|
|
|
325
|
|
|
326
|
|
|
327 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
|
|
328
|
|
|
329 %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
|
|
|
330 %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
|
|
|
331 \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
|
|
|
332 \def\ENVcheck{%
|
|
|
333 \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.}
|
|
|
334 \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
|
|
|
335
|
|
|
336 % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
|
|
|
337 \newhelp\EMsimple{Type <Return> to continue.}
|
|
|
338
|
|
|
339 \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
|
|
|
340
|
|
|
341 \def\beginxxx #1{%
|
|
|
342 \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
343 {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
|
|
|
344 \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
|
|
|
345
|
|
|
346 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
|
|
347 %
|
|
|
348 \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
|
|
|
349 \def\endxxx #1{%
|
|
|
350 \removeactivespaces{#1}%
|
|
|
351 \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
352 %
|
|
|
353 \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
354 \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
355 % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
|
|
|
356 \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
|
357 \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
|
|
|
358 \else
|
|
|
359 \unmatchedenderror\endthing
|
|
|
360 \fi
|
|
|
361 \else
|
|
|
362 % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
|
|
|
363 \csname E\endthing\endcsname
|
|
|
364 \fi
|
|
|
365 }
|
|
|
366
|
|
|
367 % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
|
|
|
368 %
|
|
|
369 \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
|
|
|
370 \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
|
371 \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
|
|
|
372 }
|
|
|
373
|
|
|
374 % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
|
|
|
375 %
|
|
|
376 \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
|
|
|
377 \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
|
|
|
378 }
|
|
|
379
|
|
|
380
|
|
|
381 % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
|
|
|
382 % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
|
|
|
383 \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
|
|
|
384 \def\singlespace{%
|
|
|
385 % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
|
|
|
386 % environments. --karl, 6may93
|
|
|
387 %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
|
|
|
388 %\kern \baselineskip}%
|
|
|
389 \setleading \singlespaceskip
|
|
|
390 }
|
|
|
391
|
|
|
392 %% Simple single-character @ commands
|
|
|
393
|
|
|
394 % @@ prints an @
|
|
|
395 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
|
|
396 \def\@{{\tt \char '100}}
|
|
|
397
|
|
|
398 % This is turned off because it was never documented
|
|
|
399 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
|
|
400 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
|
|
401 %% but suppressing ligatures.
|
|
|
402 %\def\`{{`}}
|
|
|
403 %\def\'{{'}}
|
|
|
404
|
|
|
405 % Used to generate quoted braces.
|
|
|
406 \def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}}
|
|
|
407 \def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}}
|
|
|
408 \let\{=\mylbrace
|
|
|
409 \let\}=\myrbrace
|
|
108
|
410 \begingroup
|
|
|
411 % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
|
|
|
412 \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
|
|
|
413 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
|
|
414 \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
|
|
|
415 @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
|
|
|
416 @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
|
|
|
417 @endgroup
|
|
|
418
|
|
|
419 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
|
|
420 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
|
|
|
421 \let\, = \c
|
|
|
422 \let\dotaccent = \.
|
|
|
423 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
|
|
424 \let\tieaccent = \t
|
|
|
425 \let\ubaraccent = \b
|
|
|
426 \let\udotaccent = \d
|
|
|
427
|
|
|
428 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
|
|
|
429 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
|
|
|
430 \def\questiondown{?`}
|
|
|
431 \def\exclamdown{!`}
|
|
|
432
|
|
|
433 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
|
|
434 \def\imacro{i}
|
|
|
435 \def\jmacro{j}
|
|
|
436 \def\dotless#1{%
|
|
|
437 \def\temp{#1}%
|
|
|
438 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
|
|
|
439 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
|
|
|
440 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
|
|
441 \fi\fi
|
|
|
442 }
|
|
0
|
443
|
|
|
444 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
|
|
445 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
|
|
446
|
|
|
447 % @* forces a line break.
|
|
|
448 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
|
|
449
|
|
|
450 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
|
|
451 \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
|
|
|
452
|
|
|
453 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
|
290
|
454 \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
|
|
0
|
455
|
|
|
456 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
|
290
|
457 \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
|
|
0
|
458
|
|
|
459 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
|
|
460 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
|
|
461 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
|
|
462 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
|
|
463
|
|
|
464 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
|
|
465 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
|
|
466 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
|
|
467 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
|
|
468 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
|
|
469 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
|
|
470 % the text is small, which looks bad.
|
|
|
471 %
|
|
|
472 \def\group{\begingroup
|
|
|
473 \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
|
|
|
474 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
|
|
475 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
|
|
476 \fi
|
|
|
477 %
|
|
|
478 % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
|
|
|
479 % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
|
|
|
480 % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
|
|
|
481 % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
|
|
482 % above. But it's pretty close.
|
|
|
483 \def\Egroup{%
|
|
|
484 \egroup % End the \vtop.
|
|
|
485 \endgroup % End the \group.
|
|
|
486 }%
|
|
|
487 %
|
|
|
488 \vtop\bgroup
|
|
|
489 % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
|
|
|
490 % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
|
|
|
491 % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
|
|
|
492 % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
|
|
|
493 % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
|
|
|
494 % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
|
|
|
495 \everypar = {\strut}%
|
|
|
496 %
|
|
|
497 % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
|
|
|
498 % normal interline spacing.
|
|
|
499 \offinterlineskip
|
|
|
500 %
|
|
|
501 % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
|
|
|
502 % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
|
|
|
503 % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
|
|
|
504 % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
|
|
|
505 % empty paragraph.
|
|
|
506 \ifx\par\lisppar
|
|
|
507 \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
|
|
|
508 %
|
|
|
509 % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
|
|
|
510 \obeylines
|
|
|
511 \fi
|
|
|
512 %
|
|
|
513 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
|
|
514 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
|
|
515 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
|
|
516 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
|
|
517 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
|
|
518 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
|
|
519 \comment
|
|
|
520 }
|
|
|
521 %
|
|
|
522 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
|
|
523 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
|
|
524 %
|
|
|
525 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
|
|
526 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
|
|
527 where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
|
|
528
|
|
|
529 % @need space-in-mils
|
|
|
530 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
|
|
531
|
|
|
532 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
|
|
533
|
|
|
534 \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
|
|
|
535
|
|
|
536 % Old definition--didn't work.
|
|
|
537 %\def\needx #1{\par %
|
|
|
538 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
|
|
539 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
|
|
540 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
|
|
541 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000
|
|
|
542 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
|
|
543 %}}
|
|
|
544
|
|
|
545 \def\needx#1{%
|
|
|
546 % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
|
|
547 % paragraph.
|
|
|
548 \par
|
|
|
549 %
|
|
|
550 % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
|
|
|
551 % break, since the best break might be right here.
|
|
|
552 \allowbreak
|
|
|
553 \nointerlineskip
|
|
|
554 \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
|
|
|
555 %
|
|
|
556 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
|
|
557 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
|
|
558 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
|
|
559 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
|
|
560 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
|
|
561 %
|
|
|
562 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
|
|
563 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
|
|
564 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
|
|
565 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
|
|
566 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
|
|
567 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
|
|
568 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
|
|
569 \penalty9999
|
|
|
570 %
|
|
|
571 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
|
|
572 \kern -#1\mil
|
|
|
573 %
|
|
|
574 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
|
|
575 \nobreak
|
|
|
576 }
|
|
|
577
|
|
|
578 % @br forces paragraph break
|
|
|
579
|
|
|
580 \let\br = \par
|
|
|
581
|
|
290
|
582 % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
|
|
|
583 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
|
|
|
584 % font as three actual period characters.
|
|
|
585 %
|
|
|
586 \def\dots{\hbox to 1.5em{%
|
|
|
587 \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
|
|
588 .\hss.\hss.%
|
|
|
589 \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
|
|
590 }}
|
|
|
591
|
|
|
592 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
|
|
593 %
|
|
|
594 \def\enddots{%
|
|
|
595 \hbox to 2em{%
|
|
|
596 \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
|
|
597 .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
|
|
|
598 \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
|
|
599 }%
|
|
|
600 \spacefactor=3000
|
|
|
601 }
|
|
|
602
|
|
0
|
603
|
|
|
604 % @page forces the start of a new page
|
|
|
605
|
|
|
606 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|
|
607
|
|
|
608 % @exdent text....
|
|
|
609 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
|
|
610
|
|
|
611 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
|
|
612 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
|
|
613 \newskip\exdentamount
|
|
|
614
|
|
|
615 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
|
|
616 \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
|
|
|
617 \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
|
|
618
|
|
|
619 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
|
|
620 \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
|
|
|
621 \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
|
|
622 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
|
|
623
|
|
108
|
624 % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
|
|
|
625
|
|
|
626 \def\inmargin#1{%
|
|
|
627 \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
|
|
|
628 \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
|
|
|
629 \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
|
|
|
630 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
|
|
631 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
|
|
632
|
|
0
|
633 %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
|
|
634
|
|
|
635 % @include file insert text of that file as input.
|
|
108
|
636 % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
|
|
|
637 \def\include{\begingroup
|
|
|
638 \catcode`\\=12
|
|
|
639 \catcode`~=12
|
|
|
640 \catcode`^=12
|
|
|
641 \catcode`_=12
|
|
|
642 \catcode`|=12
|
|
|
643 \catcode`<=12
|
|
|
644 \catcode`>=12
|
|
|
645 \catcode`+=12
|
|
|
646 \parsearg\includezzz}
|
|
|
647 % Restore active chars for included file.
|
|
|
648 \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
|
|
|
649 % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
|
|
|
650 \def\thisfile{#1}%
|
|
|
651 \input\thisfile
|
|
0
|
652 \endgroup}
|
|
|
653
|
|
|
654 \def\thisfile{}
|
|
|
655
|
|
|
656 % @center line outputs that line, centered
|
|
|
657
|
|
|
658 \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
|
|
|
659 \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
|
|
660 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|
|
661 \centerline{#1}}}
|
|
|
662
|
|
|
663 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
|
|
664
|
|
|
665 \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
|
|
108
|
666 \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
|
0
|
667
|
|
|
668 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
|
|
669 % @c is the same as @comment
|
|
|
670 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
|
|
671
|
|
|
672 \def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other%
|
|
|
673 \parsearg \commentxxx}
|
|
|
674
|
|
|
675 \def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 }
|
|
|
676
|
|
|
677 \let\c=\comment
|
|
|
678
|
|
108
|
679 % @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
|
|
|
680 \let\paragraphindent=\comment
|
|
|
681
|
|
0
|
682 % Prevent errors for section commands.
|
|
|
683 % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
|
|
|
684 \def\ignoresections{%
|
|
|
685 \let\chapter=\relax
|
|
|
686 \let\unnumbered=\relax
|
|
|
687 \let\top=\relax
|
|
|
688 \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
|
|
|
689 \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
|
|
|
690 \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
691 \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
692 \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
693 \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
694 \let\section=\relax
|
|
|
695 \let\subsec=\relax
|
|
|
696 \let\subsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
697 \let\subsection=\relax
|
|
|
698 \let\subsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
699 \let\appendix=\relax
|
|
|
700 \let\appendixsec=\relax
|
|
|
701 \let\appendixsection=\relax
|
|
|
702 \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
703 \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
704 \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
705 \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
706 \let\contents=\relax
|
|
|
707 \let\smallbook=\relax
|
|
|
708 \let\titlepage=\relax
|
|
|
709 }
|
|
|
710
|
|
|
711 % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
|
|
|
712 % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
|
|
|
713 % incorrectly.
|
|
|
714 %
|
|
|
715 \def\ignoremorecommands{%
|
|
108
|
716 \let\defcodeindex = \relax
|
|
0
|
717 \let\defcv = \relax
|
|
|
718 \let\deffn = \relax
|
|
|
719 \let\deffnx = \relax
|
|
|
720 \let\defindex = \relax
|
|
|
721 \let\defivar = \relax
|
|
|
722 \let\defmac = \relax
|
|
|
723 \let\defmethod = \relax
|
|
|
724 \let\defop = \relax
|
|
|
725 \let\defopt = \relax
|
|
|
726 \let\defspec = \relax
|
|
|
727 \let\deftp = \relax
|
|
|
728 \let\deftypefn = \relax
|
|
|
729 \let\deftypefun = \relax
|
|
|
730 \let\deftypevar = \relax
|
|
|
731 \let\deftypevr = \relax
|
|
|
732 \let\defun = \relax
|
|
|
733 \let\defvar = \relax
|
|
|
734 \let\defvr = \relax
|
|
|
735 \let\ref = \relax
|
|
|
736 \let\xref = \relax
|
|
|
737 \let\printindex = \relax
|
|
|
738 \let\pxref = \relax
|
|
|
739 \let\settitle = \relax
|
|
108
|
740 \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
|
|
|
741 \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
|
|
|
742 \let\everyheading = \relax
|
|
|
743 \let\evenheading = \relax
|
|
|
744 \let\oddheading = \relax
|
|
|
745 \let\everyfooting = \relax
|
|
|
746 \let\evenfooting = \relax
|
|
|
747 \let\oddfooting = \relax
|
|
|
748 \let\headings = \relax
|
|
0
|
749 \let\include = \relax
|
|
|
750 \let\lowersections = \relax
|
|
|
751 \let\down = \relax
|
|
|
752 \let\raisesections = \relax
|
|
|
753 \let\up = \relax
|
|
|
754 \let\set = \relax
|
|
|
755 \let\clear = \relax
|
|
|
756 \let\item = \relax
|
|
|
757 }
|
|
|
758
|
|
|
759 % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
|
|
|
760 %
|
|
|
761 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
|
|
762
|
|
175
|
763 % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
|
|
0
|
764 %
|
|
|
765 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
|
|
766 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
|
175
|
767 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
|
0
|
768 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
|
|
769 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
|
|
770 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
|
|
771
|
|
108
|
772 % Also ignore @macro ... @end macro. The user must run texi2dvi,
|
|
|
773 % which runs makeinfo to do macro expansion. Ignore @unmacro, too.
|
|
|
774 \def\macro{\doignore{macro}}
|
|
|
775 \let\unmacro = \comment
|
|
|
776
|
|
|
777
|
|
|
778 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
|
|
779 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
|
|
780 \let\dircategory = \comment
|
|
|
781
|
|
0
|
782 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
|
|
|
783 %
|
|
|
784 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
|
|
785 % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
|
|
786 \ignoresections
|
|
|
787 %
|
|
|
788 % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
|
|
|
789 \long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}%
|
|
|
790 %
|
|
|
791 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
|
|
792 \catcode32 = 10
|
|
|
793 %
|
|
175
|
794 % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
|
|
|
795 \catcode`\{ = 9
|
|
|
796 \catcode`\} = 9
|
|
|
797 %
|
|
0
|
798 % And now expand that command.
|
|
|
799 \doignoretext
|
|
|
800 }
|
|
|
801
|
|
|
802 % What we do to finish off ignored text.
|
|
|
803 %
|
|
|
804 \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|
|
805
|
|
|
806 \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
|
|
|
807 \def\obstexwarn{%
|
|
|
808 \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
|
|
|
809 % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
|
|
|
810 % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
|
|
|
811 \immediate\write16{}
|
|
|
812 \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
|
|
|
813 \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
|
|
|
814 \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
|
|
|
815 \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
|
|
|
816 \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
|
|
108
|
817 \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
|
|
0
|
818 \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
|
|
|
819 \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
|
|
|
820 \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
|
|
|
821 \immediate\write16{}
|
|
108
|
822 \global\warnedobstrue
|
|
0
|
823 \fi
|
|
|
824 }
|
|
|
825
|
|
|
826 % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
|
|
|
827 % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
|
|
|
828 % uncomment the following line:
|
|
|
829 %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
|
|
|
830
|
|
|
831 % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
|
|
|
832 % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
|
|
|
833 %
|
|
|
834 \def\nestedignore#1{%
|
|
|
835 \obstexwarn
|
|
|
836 % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
|
|
|
837 % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
|
|
|
838 % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
|
|
|
839 % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
|
|
|
840 % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
|
|
|
841 %
|
|
|
842 \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
843 % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
|
|
844 \ignoresections
|
|
|
845 %
|
|
|
846 % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
|
|
|
847 % @end command again.
|
|
|
848 \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|
|
849 %
|
|
|
850 % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
|
|
|
851 % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
|
|
|
852 % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
|
|
|
853 % undefine them.
|
|
|
854 %
|
|
|
855 % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
|
|
|
856 % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
|
|
|
857 \ignoremorecommands
|
|
|
858 %
|
|
|
859 % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
|
|
|
860 % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
|
|
|
861 % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
|
|
|
862 % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
|
|
|
863 % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
|
|
|
864 % stuff compared to the main input.
|
|
|
865 %
|
|
|
866 \nullfont
|
|
|
867 \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont
|
|
|
868 \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
|
|
|
869 \let\tensf = \nullfont
|
|
|
870 % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
|
|
|
871 % smallexample)
|
|
|
872 \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont
|
|
|
873 \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont
|
|
|
874 \let\indsf = \nullfont
|
|
|
875 %
|
|
|
876 % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
|
|
|
877 \tracinglostchars = 0
|
|
|
878 %
|
|
|
879 % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
|
|
|
880 \frenchspacing
|
|
|
881 %
|
|
|
882 % Don't report underfull hboxes.
|
|
|
883 \hbadness = 10000
|
|
|
884 %
|
|
|
885 % Do minimal line-breaking.
|
|
|
886 \pretolerance = 10000
|
|
|
887 %
|
|
|
888 % Do not execute instructions in @tex
|
|
175
|
889 \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
|
|
0
|
890 }
|
|
|
891
|
|
|
892 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
|
|
893 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
|
|
894 %
|
|
|
895 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
|
|
896 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
|
|
897 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
|
108
|
898 % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
|
|
|
899 % losing inside @example, for instance.
|
|
0
|
900 %
|
|
175
|
901 \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
|
|
|
902 \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
|
|
|
903 \parsearg\setxxx}
|
|
0
|
904 \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
|
|
905 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
|
|
906 \def\temp{#2}%
|
|
|
907 \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
|
|
|
908 \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
|
|
909 \fi
|
|
108
|
910 \endgroup
|
|
0
|
911 }
|
|
|
912 % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
|
|
|
913 % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
|
|
|
914 % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
|
|
|
915 \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
|
|
|
916
|
|
|
917 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
|
|
918 %
|
|
|
919 \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
|
|
|
920 \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
|
|
|
921
|
|
|
922 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
|
|
923 %
|
|
175
|
924 \def\value{\begingroup
|
|
|
925 \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
|
|
|
926 \valuexxx}
|
|
|
927 \def\valuexxx#1{%
|
|
|
928 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
929 {\{No value for ``#1''\}}%
|
|
|
930 \else
|
|
|
931 \csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|
|
932 \fi
|
|
|
933 \endgroup}
|
|
0
|
934
|
|
|
935 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
|
|
936 % with @set.
|
|
|
937 %
|
|
|
938 \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
|
|
|
939 \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
|
|
|
940 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
941 \expandafter\ifsetfail
|
|
|
942 \else
|
|
|
943 \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
|
|
|
944 \fi
|
|
|
945 }
|
|
|
946 \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
|
|
|
947 \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
|
|
|
948 \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
|
|
|
949
|
|
|
950 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
|
|
951 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
|
|
952 %
|
|
|
953 \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
|
|
|
954 \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
|
|
|
955 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
956 \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
|
|
|
957 \else
|
|
|
958 \expandafter\ifclearfail
|
|
|
959 \fi
|
|
|
960 }
|
|
|
961 \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
|
|
|
962 \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
|
|
|
963 \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
|
|
|
964
|
|
175
|
965 % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
|
|
|
966 % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex'
|
|
|
967 % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
|
|
0
|
968 %
|
|
|
969 \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
|
|
175
|
970 \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
|
|
|
971 \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
|
|
0
|
972 \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
|
|
175
|
973 \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
|
|
|
974 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
|
|
0
|
975
|
|
|
976 % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
|
|
|
977 % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
|
|
|
978 % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
|
|
|
979 % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
|
|
|
980 % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
|
|
|
981 % the @ifset might be nested.)
|
|
|
982 %
|
|
|
983 \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
|
|
|
984 \edef\temp{%
|
|
|
985 % Remember the current value of \E#1.
|
|
|
986 \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
|
|
|
987 %
|
|
|
988 % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
|
|
|
989 \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
|
|
|
990 }%
|
|
|
991 \temp
|
|
|
992 }
|
|
|
993
|
|
|
994 % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
|
|
|
995 % control sequences after we've constructed them.
|
|
|
996 %
|
|
|
997 \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
998
|
|
|
999 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
|
|
1000 %
|
|
|
1001 \def\asis#1{#1}
|
|
|
1002
|
|
|
1003 % @math means output in math mode.
|
|
|
1004 % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
|
|
|
1005 % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then,
|
|
|
1006 % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
|
|
|
1007 % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a
|
|
|
1008 % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
|
|
|
1009 %
|
|
|
1010 % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
|
|
|
1011 % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
|
|
|
1012 %
|
|
|
1013 \let\implicitmath = $
|
|
|
1014 \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
|
|
|
1015
|
|
|
1016 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
|
|
|
1017 \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
|
|
|
1018 \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
|
|
|
1019
|
|
|
1020 \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
|
|
|
1021 \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
|
|
|
1022 \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
|
|
1023 \let\nwnode=\node
|
|
|
1024 \let\lastnode=\relax
|
|
|
1025
|
|
|
1026 \def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
|
|
1027 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi
|
|
|
1028 \global\let\lastnode=\relax}
|
|
|
1029
|
|
|
1030 \def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
|
|
1031 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi
|
|
|
1032 \global\let\lastnode=\relax}
|
|
|
1033
|
|
|
1034 \def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
|
|
1035 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi
|
|
|
1036 \global\let\lastnode=\relax}
|
|
|
1037
|
|
108
|
1038 % @refill is a no-op.
|
|
0
|
1039 \let\refill=\relax
|
|
|
1040
|
|
|
1041 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
|
|
1042 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
|
|
1043 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
|
|
1044 \def\setfilename{%
|
|
|
1045 \readauxfile
|
|
|
1046 \opencontents
|
|
|
1047 \openindices
|
|
|
1048 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
|
|
1049 \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
|
175
|
1050 %
|
|
|
1051 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
|
|
1052 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
|
|
1053 % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
|
|
|
1054 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
|
|
1055 \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
|
|
|
1056 \closein1
|
|
|
1057 \temp
|
|
|
1058 %
|
|
0
|
1059 \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
|
|
1060 }
|
|
|
1061
|
|
108
|
1062 % @bye.
|
|
0
|
1063 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
|
|
1064
|
|
108
|
1065 % \def\macro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|
|
1066 % \def\macroxxx#1#2 \end macro{%
|
|
|
1067 % \expandafter\gdef\macrotemp#1{#2}%
|
|
|
1068 % \endgroup}
|
|
|
1069
|
|
|
1070 %\def\linemacro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\linemacroxxx}
|
|
|
1071 %\def\linemacroxxx#1#2 \end linemacro{%
|
|
|
1072 %\let\parsearg=\relax
|
|
|
1073 %\edef\macrotempx{\csname M\butfirst\expandafter\string\macrotemp\endcsname}%
|
|
|
1074 %\expandafter\xdef\macrotemp{\parsearg\macrotempx}%
|
|
|
1075 %\expandafter\gdef\macrotempx#1{#2}%
|
|
|
1076 %\endgroup}
|
|
|
1077
|
|
|
1078 %\def\butfirst#1{}
|
|
|
1079
|
|
0
|
1080
|
|
|
1081 \message{fonts,}
|
|
|
1082
|
|
|
1083 % Font-change commands.
|
|
|
1084
|
|
|
1085 % Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
|
|
1086 % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
|
|
|
1087 \newfam\sffam
|
|
|
1088 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
|
|
|
1089 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
|
|
1090
|
|
108
|
1091 % We don't need math for this one.
|
|
|
1092 \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
|
|
|
1093
|
|
175
|
1094 % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
|
|
|
1095 \newcount\mainmagstep
|
|
|
1096 \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
|
|
0
|
1097
|
|
|
1098 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
|
|
1099 % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
|
108
|
1100 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
|
|
|
1101 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
|
|
0
|
1102
|
|
|
1103 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
|
|
1104 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
|
|
1105 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
|
|
1106 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
|
|
1107 \def\fontprefix{cm}
|
|
|
1108 \fi
|
|
108
|
1109 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
|
|
1110 \def\rmshape{r}
|
|
|
1111 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
|
|
1112 \def\bfshape{b}
|
|
|
1113 \def\bxshape{bx}
|
|
|
1114 \def\ttshape{tt}
|
|
|
1115 \def\ttbshape{tt}
|
|
|
1116 \def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
|
|
1117 \def\itshape{ti}
|
|
|
1118 \def\itbshape{bxti}
|
|
|
1119 \def\slshape{sl}
|
|
|
1120 \def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
|
|
1121 \def\sfshape{ss}
|
|
|
1122 \def\sfbshape{ss}
|
|
|
1123 \def\scshape{csc}
|
|
|
1124 \def\scbshape{csc}
|
|
0
|
1125
|
|
|
1126 \ifx\bigger\relax
|
|
|
1127 \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
|
|
108
|
1128 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1129 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
|
|
0
|
1130 \else
|
|
108
|
1131 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1132 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
0
|
1133 \fi
|
|
|
1134 % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
|
|
|
1135 % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
|
|
|
1136 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
|
|
108
|
1137 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1138 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1139 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1140 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1141 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1142 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
0
|
1143 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|
|
1144 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|
|
1145
|
|
|
1146 % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
|
|
108
|
1147 \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
|
|
|
1148 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
0
|
1149 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
|
|
|
1150
|
|
108
|
1151 % Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
|
|
0
|
1152 % We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
|
|
|
1153 % because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
|
|
|
1154 % Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
|
|
|
1155 % aren't very useful.
|
|
108
|
1156 \setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1157 \setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1158 \setfont\indit\slshape{9}{1000}
|
|
0
|
1159 \let\indsl=\indit
|
|
|
1160 \let\indtt=\ninett
|
|
108
|
1161 \let\indttsl=\ninett
|
|
0
|
1162 \let\indsf=\indrm
|
|
|
1163 \let\indbf=\indrm
|
|
108
|
1164 \setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
|
|
0
|
1165 \font\indi=cmmi9
|
|
|
1166 \font\indsy=cmsy9
|
|
|
1167
|
|
175
|
1168 % Fonts for title page:
|
|
|
1169 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1170 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1171 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1172 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1173 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1174 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1175 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|
|
1176 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1177 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|
|
1178 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|
|
1179 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
|
|
|
1180
|
|
108
|
1181 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
|
|
1182 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1183 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1184 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1185 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1186 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
175
|
1187 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
|
|
0
|
1188 \let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
|
108
|
1189 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
0
|
1190 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
|
|
1191 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
|
|
1192
|
|
108
|
1193 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
|
|
1194 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1195 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1196 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1197 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1198 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1199 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1200 \let\secbf\secrm
|
|
|
1201 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
0
|
1202 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|
|
1203 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|
|
1204
|
|
108
|
1205 % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad.
|
|
|
1206 % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded.
|
|
|
1207 % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1208 % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1209 % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1210
|
|
|
1211 %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
|
|
|
1212 %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than
|
|
|
1213 %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1.
|
|
|
1214 %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1215 %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
|
|
0
|
1216
|
|
|
1217 %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
|
|
|
1218
|
|
108
|
1219 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
|
|
1220 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
|
1221 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1222 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1223 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
175
|
1224 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
|
|
108
|
1225 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
|
1226 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|
|
1227 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
0
|
1228 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
|
175
|
1229 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
|
0
|
1230 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
|
|
|
1231 % but that is not a standard magnification.
|
|
|
1232
|
|
|
1233 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
|
|
1234 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
|
|
1235 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
|
|
|
1236 % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
|
|
|
1237 % also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
|
|
1238 %
|
|
|
1239 \def\resetmathfonts{%
|
|
|
1240 \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
|
|
|
1241 \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
|
|
|
1242 \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
|
|
|
1243 }
|
|
|
1244
|
|
|
1245
|
|
|
1246 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
|
|
1247 % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
|
|
|
1248 % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
|
|
108
|
1249 % cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
|
|
|
1250 % \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
|
|
|
1251 % redefine \bf itself.
|
|
0
|
1252 \def\textfonts{%
|
|
|
1253 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
|
|
1254 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
|
108
|
1255 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
|
0
|
1256 \resetmathfonts}
|
|
175
|
1257 \def\titlefonts{%
|
|
|
1258 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
|
|
1259 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
|
|
1260 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
|
|
1261 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
|
|
1262 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
|
290
|
1263 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
|
0
|
1264 \def\chapfonts{%
|
|
|
1265 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
|
|
1266 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
|
108
|
1267 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
|
|
1268 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
|
0
|
1269 \def\secfonts{%
|
|
|
1270 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
|
|
1271 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
|
108
|
1272 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
|
|
1273 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
|
0
|
1274 \def\subsecfonts{%
|
|
|
1275 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
|
|
1276 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
|
108
|
1277 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
|
|
1278 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
|
|
1279 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
|
|
0
|
1280 \def\indexfonts{%
|
|
|
1281 \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
|
|
|
1282 \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
|
|
108
|
1283 \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
|
|
|
1284 \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
|
|
0
|
1285
|
|
|
1286 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
|
|
1287 %
|
|
|
1288 \textfonts
|
|
|
1289
|
|
290
|
1290 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
|
|
1291 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
|
|
1292 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
|
|
1293
|
|
0
|
1294 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
|
|
1295 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
|
|
1296
|
|
|
1297 % Fonts for short table of contents.
|
|
108
|
1298 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1299 \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1300 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
|
|
0
|
1301
|
|
|
1302 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
|
|
1303 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
|
|
1304
|
|
|
1305 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
|
|
1306 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
|
|
1307 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
1308 \def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
|
1309
|
|
|
1310 \let\i=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1311 \let\var=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1312 \let\dfn=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1313 \let\emph=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1314 \let\cite=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1315
|
|
|
1316 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
|
|
1317 \let\strong=\b
|
|
|
1318
|
|
|
1319 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
|
|
1320 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
|
|
1321 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
|
|
1322 %
|
|
|
1323 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
|
|
1324 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
|
|
1325
|
|
|
1326 \def\t#1{%
|
|
108
|
1327 {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
|
|
0
|
1328 \null
|
|
|
1329 }
|
|
108
|
1330 \let\ttfont=\t
|
|
290
|
1331 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
|
|
108
|
1332 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
|
|
1333 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|
|
1334 \def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
|
290
|
1335 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
|
108
|
1336 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
|
290
|
1337 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
|
108
|
1338 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
|
290
|
1339 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
|
108
|
1340 % The old definition, with no lozenge:
|
|
|
1341 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
|
|
0
|
1342 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
|
|
1343
|
|
|
1344 \let\file=\samp
|
|
|
1345
|
|
|
1346 % @code is a modification of @t,
|
|
|
1347 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
|
|
1348 \def\tclose#1{%
|
|
|
1349 {%
|
|
|
1350 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
|
|
1351 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
|
|
1352 %
|
|
|
1353 % Switch to typewriter.
|
|
|
1354 \tt
|
|
|
1355 %
|
|
|
1356 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
|
|
1357 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
|
|
1358 %
|
|
|
1359 % Turn off hyphenation.
|
|
|
1360 \nohyphenation
|
|
|
1361 %
|
|
|
1362 \rawbackslash
|
|
|
1363 \frenchspacing
|
|
|
1364 #1%
|
|
|
1365 }%
|
|
|
1366 \null
|
|
|
1367 }
|
|
|
1368
|
|
|
1369 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
|
|
108
|
1370 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
|
0
|
1371 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
|
|
1372
|
|
|
1373 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
|
|
1374 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
|
|
1375 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
|
108
|
1376 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
|
0
|
1377 % -- rms.
|
|
|
1378 {
|
|
|
1379 \catcode`\-=\active
|
|
|
1380 \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
175
|
1381 \catcode`\|=\active
|
|
0
|
1382 \global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex}
|
|
|
1383 % The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names
|
|
|
1384 % wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is
|
|
|
1385 % read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is
|
|
|
1386 % ever called. -- mycroft
|
|
175
|
1387 % _ is always active; and it shouldn't be \let = to an _ that is a
|
|
|
1388 % subscript character anyway. Then, @cindex @samp{_} (for example)
|
|
|
1389 % fails. --karl
|
|
|
1390 \global\def\indexbreaks{%
|
|
|
1391 \catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash
|
|
|
1392 }
|
|
50
|
1393 }
|
|
108
|
1394
|
|
0
|
1395 \def\realdash{-}
|
|
|
1396 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
|
175
|
1397 \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
|
|
0
|
1398 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
|
|
1399
|
|
|
1400 %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary
|
|
|
1401
|
|
|
1402 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
|
|
1403 % then @kbd has no effect.
|
|
175
|
1404
|
|
|
1405 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
|
|
1406 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
|
|
1407 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
|
|
1408 \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
|
|
|
1409 \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
|
|
|
1410 \def\arg{#1}%
|
|
|
1411 \ifx\arg\worddistinct
|
|
|
1412 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
|
|
1413 \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
|
|
|
1414 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|
|
1415 \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
|
|
|
1416 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|
|
1417 \fi\fi\fi
|
|
|
1418 }
|
|
|
1419 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
|
|
1420 \def\wordexample{example}
|
|
|
1421 \def\wordcode{code}
|
|
|
1422
|
|
|
1423 % Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
|
|
|
1424 % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
|
|
|
1425 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
|
|
|
1426
|
|
0
|
1427 \def\xkey{\key}
|
|
|
1428 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
|
|
1429 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
|
175
|
1430 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
|
|
|
1431 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
|
|
|
1432
|
|
181
|
1433 % @url. Quotes do not seem necessary, so use \code.
|
|
|
1434 \let\url=\code
|
|
175
|
1435
|
|
|
1436 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument
|
|
|
1437 % specifying the text to display. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
|
|
181
|
1438 % Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here.
|
|
175
|
1439 %
|
|
|
1440 \def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish}
|
|
|
1441 \def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|
|
1442 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
|
1443 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|
|
1444 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})%
|
|
|
1445 \else
|
|
|
1446 \code{#1}%
|
|
|
1447 \fi
|
|
|
1448 }
|
|
108
|
1449
|
|
181
|
1450 % rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
|
|
1451 % So now @email is just like @uref.
|
|
290
|
1452 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
|
181
|
1453 \let\email=\uref
|
|
|
1454
|
|
108
|
1455 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
|
|
1456 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
|
|
1457 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
|
|
1458 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
|
175
|
1459 %
|
|
108
|
1460 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
|
0
|
1461
|
|
|
1462 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
|
|
1463 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of
|
|
|
1464 % @dmn{}pt.
|
|
|
1465 %
|
|
|
1466 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
|
|
1467
|
|
|
1468 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
|
|
|
1469
|
|
108
|
1470 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
|
|
1471 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
|
|
1472 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
|
|
1473 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
|
|
1474
|
|
|
1475 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
|
0
|
1476 % Use of \lowercase was suggested.
|
|
108
|
1477 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
|
|
1478 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
|
|
1479
|
|
|
1480 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
|
|
|
1481 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
|
|
1482
|
|
0
|
1483
|
|
|
1484 \message{page headings,}
|
|
|
1485
|
|
|
1486 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
|
|
1487 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
|
|
1488
|
|
|
1489 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
|
|
1490 \newif\ifseenauthor
|
|
|
1491 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
|
|
1492
|
|
|
1493 \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
|
|
|
1494 \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
|
108
|
1495 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
|
0
|
1496
|
|
|
1497 \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
|
|
1498 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
|
|
1499 % I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined.
|
|
|
1500 % This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms.
|
|
|
1501 % \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12
|
|
|
1502 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
|
|
|
1503 %
|
|
|
1504 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
|
|
|
1505 %
|
|
|
1506 % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
|
|
1507 \vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
|
|
1508 %
|
|
|
1509 % Now you can print the title using @title.
|
|
|
1510 \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
|
|
175
|
1511 \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
|
|
108
|
1512 % print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
|
|
1513 \finishedtitlepagefalse
|
|
|
1514 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
|
|
0
|
1515 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
|
|
1516 \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|
|
1517 %
|
|
|
1518 % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
|
|
|
1519 \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
|
|
|
1520 \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
|
|
|
1521 %
|
|
|
1522 % @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
|
|
1523 \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
|
|
|
1524 \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
|
|
|
1525 {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
|
|
|
1526 %
|
|
|
1527 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
|
|
1528 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
|
|
1529 \let\oldpage = \page
|
|
|
1530 \def\page{%
|
|
|
1531 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|
108
|
1532 \finishtitlepage
|
|
0
|
1533 \fi
|
|
|
1534 \oldpage
|
|
|
1535 \let\page = \oldpage
|
|
|
1536 \hbox{}}%
|
|
|
1537 % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
|
|
|
1538 }
|
|
|
1539
|
|
|
1540 \def\Etitlepage{%
|
|
|
1541 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|
|
1542 \finishtitlepage
|
|
|
1543 \fi
|
|
|
1544 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
|
|
1545 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
|
|
1546 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
|
|
1547 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
|
|
1548 \oldpage
|
|
|
1549 \endgroup
|
|
|
1550 \HEADINGSon
|
|
|
1551 }
|
|
|
1552
|
|
|
1553 \def\finishtitlepage{%
|
|
|
1554 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
|
|
1555 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
|
|
1556 \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|
|
1557 }
|
|
|
1558
|
|
|
1559 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
|
|
1560
|
|
|
1561 \let\thispage=\folio
|
|
|
1562
|
|
|
1563 \newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages
|
|
|
1564 \newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages
|
|
|
1565 \newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages
|
|
|
1566 \newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages
|
|
|
1567
|
|
|
1568 % Now make Tex use those variables
|
|
|
1569 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
|
|
1570 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
|
|
1571 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
|
|
1572 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
|
|
1573 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
|
|
1574
|
|
|
1575 % Commands to set those variables.
|
|
|
1576 % For example, this is what @headings on does
|
|
|
1577 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
|
|
1578 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
|
|
1579 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
|
|
1580 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
|
|
1581
|
|
|
1582 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
|
|
1583 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
|
|
1584 \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
|
|
|
1585
|
|
|
1586 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
|
|
1587 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
|
|
1588 \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
|
|
|
1589
|
|
|
1590 {\catcode`\@=0 %
|
|
|
1591
|
|
|
1592 \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1593 \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1594 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
1595
|
|
|
1596 \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1597 \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1598 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
1599
|
|
175
|
1600 \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
|
0
|
1601
|
|
|
1602 \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1603 \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1604 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
1605
|
|
|
1606 \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1607 \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
175
|
1608 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
|
|
1609 %
|
|
|
1610 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
|
|
1611 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
|
|
1612 \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
|
|
|
1613 \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
|
|
|
1614 }
|
|
|
1615
|
|
|
1616 \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
|
0
|
1617 %
|
|
|
1618 }% unbind the catcode of @.
|
|
|
1619
|
|
108
|
1620 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
|
|
1621 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
|
|
1622 % @headings off turns them off.
|
|
|
1623 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
|
|
1624 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|
|
1625 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|
0
|
1626 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
|
108
|
1627 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
|
|
1628 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
|
0
|
1629
|
|
|
1630 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
1631
|
|
|
1632 \def\HEADINGSoff{
|
|
|
1633 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1634 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
|
|
1635 \HEADINGSoff
|
|
|
1636 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
|
|
1637 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
|
|
1638 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
|
|
1639 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
|
|
1640 % edge of all pages.
|
|
|
1641 \def\HEADINGSdouble{
|
|
|
1642 \global\pageno=1
|
|
|
1643 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1644 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1645 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|
|
1646 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
108
|
1647 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
0
|
1648 }
|
|
108
|
1649 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
1650
|
|
0
|
1651 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
|
|
1652 % page number on top right.
|
|
|
1653 \def\HEADINGSsingle{
|
|
|
1654 \global\pageno=1
|
|
|
1655 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1656 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1657 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1658 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
108
|
1659 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
0
|
1660 }
|
|
|
1661 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
|
|
1662
|
|
|
1663 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
|
|
1664 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
|
|
1665 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
|
|
1666 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1667 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1668 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|
|
1669 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
108
|
1670 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
0
|
1671 }
|
|
|
1672
|
|
|
1673 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
|
|
1674 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
|
|
1675 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1676 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1677 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1678 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
108
|
1679 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
0
|
1680 }
|
|
|
1681
|
|
|
1682 % Subroutines used in generating headings
|
|
|
1683 % Produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
|
|
1684 \def\today{\number\day\space
|
|
|
1685 \ifcase\month\or
|
|
|
1686 January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
|
|
1687 July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
|
|
1688 \space\number\year}
|
|
|
1689
|
|
|
1690 % Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
|
|
|
1691 %\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
|
|
|
1692 %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
|
|
1693 %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
|
|
1694 %\space\number\day, \number\year}
|
|
|
1695
|
|
|
1696 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings
|
|
|
1697 % It generates no output of its own
|
|
|
1698
|
|
|
1699 \def\thistitle{No Title}
|
|
|
1700 \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
|
|
|
1701 \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
|
|
|
1702
|
|
108
|
1703
|
|
0
|
1704 \message{tables,}
|
|
|
1705
|
|
|
1706 % @tabs -- simple alignment
|
|
|
1707
|
|
|
1708 % These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer.
|
|
|
1709 % So these macros cannot even be defined.
|
|
|
1710
|
|
|
1711 %\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz}
|
|
|
1712 %\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr}
|
|
|
1713 %\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz}
|
|
|
1714 %\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr}
|
|
|
1715 %\def\&{&}
|
|
|
1716
|
|
|
1717 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
|
|
|
1718
|
|
|
1719 % default indentation of table text
|
|
|
1720 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
|
|
1721 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
|
|
1722 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
|
|
1723 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
|
|
1724 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
|
|
1725
|
|
|
1726 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
|
|
1727 \newdimen\itemmax
|
|
|
1728
|
|
|
1729 % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
|
|
1730 % these defs.
|
|
|
1731 % They also define \itemindex
|
|
|
1732 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
|
|
1733
|
|
|
1734 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
|
|
1735
|
|
108
|
1736 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
|
0
|
1737
|
|
|
1738 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|
|
1739 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|
|
1740
|
|
|
1741 \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
|
|
1742 \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
|
|
1743
|
|
|
1744 \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
|
|
1745 \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
|
|
1746
|
|
|
1747 \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
|
|
|
1748 \itemzzz {#1}}
|
|
|
1749
|
|
|
1750 \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
|
|
|
1751 \itemzzz {#1}}
|
|
|
1752
|
|
|
1753 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
|
|
1754 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|
|
1755 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
|
|
1756 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
|
|
|
1757 \itemindex{#1}%
|
|
|
1758 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
|
|
1759 %
|
|
|
1760 % Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph.
|
|
|
1761 %{\parskip = 0in
|
|
|
1762 %\par
|
|
|
1763 %}%
|
|
|
1764 %
|
|
|
1765 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
|
|
1766 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
|
|
1767 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
|
|
1768 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
|
|
1769 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
|
|
1770 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
|
|
1771 %
|
|
|
1772 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
|
|
1773 % but leave it ragged-right.
|
|
|
1774 \begingroup
|
|
|
1775 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
|
|
1776 \advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
|
|
1777 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
|
|
1778 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
|
|
1779 \endgroup
|
|
|
1780 %
|
|
|
1781 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
|
|
1782 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
|
|
1783 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
|
|
1784 %
|
|
|
1785 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
|
|
|
1786 % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
|
|
|
1787 % \baselineskip glue.
|
|
|
1788 \nobreak
|
|
|
1789 \endgroup
|
|
|
1790 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
|
|
1791 \else
|
|
|
1792 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
|
|
1793 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that
|
|
|
1794 % text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in
|
|
|
1795 % a zero-width box.
|
|
|
1796 \noindent
|
|
|
1797 \rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces%
|
|
|
1798 \endgroup%
|
|
|
1799 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue%
|
|
|
1800 \fi
|
|
|
1801 }
|
|
|
1802
|
|
|
1803 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1804 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1805 \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1806 \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1807 \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1808 \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1809
|
|
|
1810 %% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work
|
|
|
1811 \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
|
|
|
1812
|
|
|
1813 \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
|
|
|
1814 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
|
|
1815 \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
|
|
|
1816 \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
|
|
|
1817
|
|
|
1818 \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
|
|
|
1819 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
|
|
1820 \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
|
|
|
1821 \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
|
|
|
1822 \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1823 \let\Etable=\relax}}
|
|
|
1824
|
|
|
1825 \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
|
|
|
1826 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
|
|
1827 \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
|
|
|
1828 \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
|
|
|
1829 \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1830 \let\Etable=\relax}}
|
|
|
1831
|
|
|
1832 \def\dontindex #1{}
|
|
|
1833 \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
|
|
|
1834 \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
|
|
|
1835
|
|
|
1836 {\obeyspaces %
|
|
|
1837 \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
|
|
|
1838 \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
|
|
|
1839
|
|
|
1840 \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
|
|
1841 \aboveenvbreak %
|
|
|
1842 \begingroup %
|
|
108
|
1843 \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
|
|
0
|
1844 \let\itemindex=#1%
|
|
|
1845 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
|
|
|
1846 \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
|
|
|
1847 \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
|
|
|
1848 \def\itemfont{#2}%
|
|
|
1849 \itemmax=\tableindent %
|
|
|
1850 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
|
|
1851 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
|
|
|
1852 \exdentamount=\tableindent
|
|
|
1853 \parindent = 0pt
|
|
|
1854 \parskip = \smallskipamount
|
|
|
1855 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
|
|
1856 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1857 \let\item = \internalBitem %
|
|
|
1858 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
|
|
|
1859 \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
|
|
|
1860 \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
|
|
|
1861 \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
|
|
|
1862 \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
|
|
|
1863 }
|
|
|
1864
|
|
|
1865 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
|
|
1866
|
|
|
1867 \newcount \itemno
|
|
|
1868
|
|
|
1869 \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
|
|
|
1870
|
|
|
1871 \def\itemizezzz #1{%
|
|
|
1872 \begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize
|
|
|
1873 \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
|
|
|
1874 }
|
|
|
1875
|
|
|
1876 \def\itemizey #1#2{%
|
|
|
1877 \aboveenvbreak %
|
|
|
1878 \itemmax=\itemindent %
|
|
|
1879 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
|
|
1880 \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
|
|
|
1881 \exdentamount=\itemindent
|
|
|
1882 \parindent = 0pt %
|
|
|
1883 \parskip = \smallskipamount %
|
|
|
1884 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
|
|
1885 \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1886 \def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
|
|
1887 \let\item=\itemizeitem}
|
|
|
1888
|
|
|
1889 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
|
|
1890 % These are `.?!:;,'
|
|
|
1891 \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
|
|
|
1892 \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
|
|
|
1893
|
|
|
1894 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
|
|
1895 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
|
|
1896 %
|
|
|
1897 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
|
|
1898
|
|
|
1899 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
|
|
1900 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
|
|
1901 % argument is the same as `1'.
|
|
|
1902 %
|
|
|
1903 \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
|
|
|
1904 \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
|
|
1905 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
|
|
1906 \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
|
|
|
1907 %
|
|
|
1908 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
|
|
1909 \def\thearg{#1}%
|
|
|
1910 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
|
|
1911 %
|
|
|
1912 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
|
|
1913 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
|
|
1914 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
|
|
1915 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
|
|
1916 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
|
|
1917 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
|
|
1918 \ifx\rest\empty
|
|
|
1919 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
|
|
1920 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
|
|
1921 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
|
|
1922 % not equal to itself.
|
|
|
1923 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
|
|
1924 %
|
|
|
1925 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
|
|
1926 % continuing to look for a <number>.
|
|
|
1927 %
|
|
|
1928 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
|
|
1929 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
|
|
1930 \else
|
|
|
1931 % It's a letter.
|
|
|
1932 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
|
|
1933 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
|
|
1934 \else
|
|
|
1935 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
|
|
1936 \fi
|
|
|
1937 \fi
|
|
|
1938 \else
|
|
|
1939 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
|
|
1940 \numericenumerate
|
|
|
1941 \fi
|
|
|
1942 }
|
|
|
1943
|
|
|
1944 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
|
|
1945 % given in \thearg.
|
|
|
1946 %
|
|
|
1947 \def\numericenumerate{%
|
|
|
1948 \itemno = \thearg
|
|
|
1949 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
|
|
1950 }
|
|
|
1951
|
|
|
1952 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|
|
1953 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
|
|
1954 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|
|
1955 \startenumeration{%
|
|
|
1956 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|
|
1957 \ifnum\itemno=0
|
|
|
1958 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|
|
1959 alphabet}%
|
|
|
1960 \fi
|
|
|
1961 \char\lccode\itemno
|
|
|
1962 }%
|
|
|
1963 }
|
|
|
1964
|
|
|
1965 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|
|
1966 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
|
|
1967 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|
|
1968 \startenumeration{%
|
|
|
1969 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|
|
1970 \ifnum\itemno=0
|
|
|
1971 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|
|
1972 alphabet}
|
|
|
1973 \fi
|
|
|
1974 \char\uccode\itemno
|
|
|
1975 }%
|
|
|
1976 }
|
|
|
1977
|
|
|
1978 % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
|
|
1979 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
|
|
1980 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
|
|
1981 %
|
|
|
1982 \def\startenumeration#1{%
|
|
|
1983 \advance\itemno by -1
|
|
|
1984 \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
|
|
|
1985 }
|
|
|
1986
|
|
|
1987 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
|
|
1988 % to @enumerate.
|
|
|
1989 %
|
|
|
1990 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
|
|
1991 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
|
|
1992 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|
|
1993 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|
|
1994
|
|
|
1995 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
|
|
|
1996
|
|
|
1997 \def\itemizeitem{%
|
|
|
1998 \advance\itemno by 1
|
|
|
1999 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
|
|
175
|
2000 \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
|
|
0
|
2001 {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
|
|
|
2002 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
|
|
|
2003 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
|
|
|
2004 \flushcr}
|
|
|
2005
|
|
|
2006 % @multitable macros
|
|
108
|
2007 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
|
0
|
2008 %
|
|
108
|
2009 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
|
|
2010 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
|
0
|
2011 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
|
|
2012 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
|
|
2013
|
|
|
2014 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
|
|
2015
|
|
|
2016 % To make preamble:
|
|
|
2017 %
|
|
175
|
2018 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
|
108
|
2019 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
|
0
|
2020 % @item ...
|
|
|
2021 %
|
|
108
|
2022 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
|
0
|
2023 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
|
|
2024 % columns as desired.
|
|
|
2025
|
|
108
|
2026
|
|
0
|
2027 % Or use a template:
|
|
|
2028 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|
|
2029 % @item ...
|
|
|
2030 % using the widest term desired in each column.
|
|
108
|
2031 %
|
|
|
2032 % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
|
|
|
2033 % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
|
|
|
2034 % will parse correctly, i.e.,
|
|
|
2035 %
|
|
175
|
2036 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
|
|
108
|
2037 % template}
|
|
|
2038 % Not:
|
|
175
|
2039 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
|
|
108
|
2040 % {Column 3 template}
|
|
70
|
2041
|
|
175
|
2042 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
|
0
|
2043 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
|
|
2044 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
|
|
2045 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
|
|
2046
|
|
108
|
2047 % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
|
|
0
|
2048 % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
|
|
|
2049
|
|
|
2050 % Sample multitable:
|
|
|
2051
|
|
|
2052 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|
|
2053 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
|
175
|
2054 % @item
|
|
|
2055 % first col stuff
|
|
|
2056 % @tab
|
|
|
2057 % second col stuff
|
|
|
2058 % @tab
|
|
|
2059 % third col
|
|
|
2060 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
|
0
|
2061 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
|
175
|
2062 %
|
|
0
|
2063 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
|
|
2064 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
|
108
|
2065 % @end multitable
|
|
0
|
2066
|
|
|
2067 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
|
108
|
2068 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
|
|
2069 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
|
|
2070 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
|
|
2071 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
|
|
2072 % to baseline.
|
|
|
2073 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
|
290
|
2074 %
|
|
108
|
2075 \newskip\multitableparskip
|
|
|
2076 \newskip\multitableparindent
|
|
|
2077 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2078 \newskip\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2079 \multitableparskip=0pt
|
|
|
2080 \multitableparindent=6pt
|
|
|
2081 \multitablecolspace=12pt
|
|
|
2082 \multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|
0
|
2083
|
|
|
2084 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
|
290
|
2085 %
|
|
0
|
2086 \let\endsetuptable\relax
|
|
|
2087 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
|
108
|
2088 \let\columnfractions\relax
|
|
|
2089 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
|
0
|
2090 \newif\ifsetpercent
|
|
|
2091
|
|
290
|
2092 % 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit.
|
|
108
|
2093 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 %
|
|
|
2094 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}%
|
|
|
2095 \setuptable}
|
|
|
2096
|
|
0
|
2097 \newcount\colcount
|
|
|
2098 \def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
|
|
2099 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax%
|
|
|
2100 \else
|
|
108
|
2101 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue%
|
|
0
|
2102 \else
|
|
|
2103 \ifsetpercent
|
|
108
|
2104 \let\go\pickupwholefraction % In this case arg of setuptable
|
|
|
2105 % is the decimal point before the
|
|
|
2106 % number given in percent of hsize.
|
|
|
2107 % We don't need this so we don't use it.
|
|
0
|
2108 \else
|
|
|
2109 \global\advance\colcount by1
|
|
108
|
2110 \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
|
|
|
2111 % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
|
0
|
2112 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
|
|
2113 \fi%
|
|
|
2114 \fi%
|
|
108
|
2115 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi%
|
|
0
|
2116 \fi\go}
|
|
108
|
2117
|
|
0
|
2118 % multitable syntax
|
|
108
|
2119 \def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
|
|
|
2120 % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
|
|
|
2121 % maintained, even if it is never used.
|
|
|
2122
|
|
|
2123 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
|
|
2124
|
|
|
2125 \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
|
|
|
2126 \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
|
|
290
|
2127 \vskip\parskip
|
|
|
2128 \let\item\crcr
|
|
|
2129 \tolerance=9500
|
|
|
2130 \hbadness=9500
|
|
|
2131 \setmultitablespacing
|
|
|
2132 \parskip=\multitableparskip
|
|
|
2133 \parindent=\multitableparindent
|
|
|
2134 \overfullrule=0pt
|
|
|
2135 \global\colcount=0
|
|
|
2136 \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
|
|
|
2137 %
|
|
|
2138 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
|
|
2139 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
|
|
2140 %
|
|
|
2141 % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
|
|
|
2142 % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
|
|
|
2143 % The table preamble
|
|
|
2144 % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
|
|
|
2145 \everycr{\noalign{%
|
|
|
2146 %
|
|
|
2147 % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
|
|
2148 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
|
|
|
2149 % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
|
|
|
2150 % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
|
|
2151 \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
|
|
|
2152 %
|
|
|
2153 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
|
|
2154 % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
|
|
2155 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
|
|
2156 % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
|
|
2157 \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
|
|
|
2158 \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
|
|
2159 %
|
|
|
2160 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
|
|
2161 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
|
|
2162 % the first one.
|
|
|
2163 %
|
|
|
2164 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2165 % to the width of each template entry.
|
|
|
2166 %
|
|
|
2167 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
|
|
2168 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
|
|
2169 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
|
|
2170 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
|
|
2171 %
|
|
|
2172 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
|
|
2173 \rightskip=0pt
|
|
|
2174 \ifnum\colcount=1
|
|
|
2175 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
|
|
2176 \advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
|
0
|
2177 \else
|
|
290
|
2178 \ifsetpercent \else
|
|
|
2179 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
|
|
2180 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
|
|
2181 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2182 \fi
|
|
|
2183 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
|
|
2184 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
|
0
|
2185 \fi
|
|
290
|
2186 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
|
|
2187 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
|
|
2188 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
|
|
2189 % For example:
|
|
|
2190 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
|
|
2191 % @item @code{#}
|
|
|
2192 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
|
|
2193 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
|
|
|
2194 % characters.
|
|
|
2195 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
|
|
108
|
2196 }
|
|
|
2197
|
|
|
2198 \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
|
|
|
2199 % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
|
|
|
2200 % current baselineskip.
|
|
|
2201 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|
|
2202 %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
|
|
|
2203 %% to keep lines equally spaced
|
|
|
2204 \let\multistrut = \strut
|
|
|
2205 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
|
175
|
2206 %% table. If not, do nothing.
|
|
108
|
2207 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
|
|
2208 \else
|
|
|
2209 \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
|
|
|
2210 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
|
|
2211 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2212 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2213 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|
|
2214 %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|
|
2215 \fi%
|
|
|
2216 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|
|
2217 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2218 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|
|
2219 %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|
|
2220 \fi}
|
|
|
2221
|
|
0
|
2222
|
|
|
2223 \message{indexing,}
|
|
|
2224 % Index generation facilities
|
|
|
2225
|
|
|
2226 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
|
|
2227 % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
|
|
|
2228 {\catcode`\@=11
|
|
|
2229 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
|
|
|
2230
|
|
|
2231 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
|
|
2232 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
|
|
2233 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
|
|
2234 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
|
108
|
2235 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
|
0
|
2236 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
|
|
2237 % for the sake of vms.
|
|
|
2238
|
|
|
2239 \def\newindex #1{
|
|
|
2240 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file
|
|
108
|
2241 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
|
|
2242 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
|
|
0
|
2243 \noexpand\doindex {#1}}
|
|
|
2244 }
|
|
|
2245
|
|
|
2246 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
|
|
2247
|
|
|
2248 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
|
|
2249
|
|
|
2250 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
|
|
2251
|
|
|
2252 \def\newcodeindex #1{
|
|
|
2253 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file
|
|
108
|
2254 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
|
|
2255 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
|
|
0
|
2256 \noexpand\docodeindex {#1}}
|
|
|
2257 }
|
|
|
2258
|
|
|
2259 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
|
|
2260
|
|
|
2261 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
|
|
2262 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
|
|
2263 \def\synindex #1 #2 {%
|
|
|
2264 \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2265 \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
|
|
108
|
2266 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
|
|
0
|
2267 \noexpand\doindex {#2}}%
|
|
|
2268 }
|
|
|
2269
|
|
|
2270 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
|
|
2271 % inside @code.
|
|
|
2272 \def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {%
|
|
|
2273 \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2274 \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
|
|
108
|
2275 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
|
|
0
|
2276 \noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}%
|
|
|
2277 }
|
|
|
2278
|
|
|
2279 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
|
|
2280 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
|
|
2281 % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
|
|
2282
|
|
|
2283 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
|
|
2284 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
|
|
2285
|
|
|
2286 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|
|
2287 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
|
|
2288
|
|
|
2289 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
|
|
2290 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
|
|
2291
|
|
|
2292 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
|
|
2293 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
|
|
2294 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
|
|
2295
|
|
|
2296 \def\indexdummies{%
|
|
|
2297 % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
|
|
|
2298 \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
|
|
|
2299 \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
|
|
|
2300 \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
|
|
|
2301 \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
|
|
|
2302 \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
|
|
|
2303 \def\={\realbackslash =}%
|
|
|
2304 \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
|
|
|
2305 \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
|
|
|
2306 \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
|
|
|
2307 \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
|
|
|
2308 \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
|
|
|
2309 \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
|
|
|
2310 % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
|
|
2311 \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
|
|
|
2312 \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
|
|
|
2313 \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
|
|
|
2314 \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
|
|
|
2315 \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
|
|
|
2316 \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
|
|
|
2317 \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
|
|
|
2318 \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
|
|
|
2319 \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
|
|
|
2320 \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
|
|
|
2321 \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
|
|
|
2322 % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
|
|
108
|
2323 % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
|
|
|
2324 % laboriously list every single command here.)
|
|
|
2325 \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
|
|
|
2326 %\let\{ = \lbracecmd
|
|
|
2327 %\let\} = \rbracecmd
|
|
0
|
2328 \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
|
|
|
2329 \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
|
|
|
2330 \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
|
|
108
|
2331 %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
|
|
0
|
2332 \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
|
|
|
2333 \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
|
|
|
2334 \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
|
|
|
2335 \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
|
|
|
2336 \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
|
|
|
2337 \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
|
|
108
|
2338 %\def\char{\realbackslash char}%
|
|
0
|
2339 \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
|
|
|
2340 \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
|
|
175
|
2341 \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
|
|
|
2342 \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
|
|
|
2343 \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
|
|
|
2344 \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
|
|
|
2345 \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
|
|
|
2346 \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
|
|
|
2347 \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
|
|
0
|
2348 \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
|
|
|
2349 \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
|
|
108
|
2350 \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
|
|
0
|
2351 \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
|
|
108
|
2352 \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
|
|
|
2353 \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
|
|
0
|
2354 \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
|
|
|
2355 \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
|
|
|
2356 \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
|
|
175
|
2357 \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
|
|
0
|
2358 \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
|
|
|
2359 \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
|
|
|
2360 \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
|
|
|
2361 \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
|
|
|
2362 \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
|
|
|
2363 \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
|
|
|
2364 \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
|
|
175
|
2365 \def\value##1{\realbackslash value {##1}}%
|
|
108
|
2366 \unsepspaces
|
|
0
|
2367 }
|
|
|
2368
|
|
108
|
2369 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
|
|
2370 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
|
|
2371 % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
|
|
2372 {\obeyspaces
|
|
|
2373 \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
|
|
|
2374
|
|
0
|
2375 % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
|
|
|
2376 % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
|
|
|
2377 \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
|
|
|
2378 \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
|
|
|
2379 \def\indexdummydots{...}
|
|
|
2380
|
|
|
2381 \def\indexnofonts{%
|
|
|
2382 % Just ignore accents.
|
|
108
|
2383 \let\,=\indexdummyfont
|
|
0
|
2384 \let\"=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2385 \let\`=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2386 \let\'=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2387 \let\^=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2388 \let\~=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2389 \let\==\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2390 \let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2391 \let\c=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2392 \let\d=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2393 \let\u=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2394 \let\v=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2395 \let\H=\indexdummyfont
|
|
108
|
2396 \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
|
|
0
|
2397 % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
|
|
2398 \def\oe{oe}%
|
|
|
2399 \def\ae{ae}%
|
|
|
2400 \def\aa{aa}%
|
|
|
2401 \def\OE{OE}%
|
|
|
2402 \def\AE{AE}%
|
|
|
2403 \def\AA{AA}%
|
|
|
2404 \def\o{o}%
|
|
|
2405 \def\O{O}%
|
|
|
2406 \def\l{l}%
|
|
|
2407 \def\L{L}%
|
|
|
2408 \def\ss{ss}%
|
|
|
2409 \let\w=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2410 \let\t=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2411 \let\r=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2412 \let\i=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2413 \let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2414 \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2415 \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2416 \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2417 \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2418 %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
|
|
2419 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
|
|
|
2420 %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2421 \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2422 \let\code=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2423 \let\file=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2424 \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2425 \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2426 \let\key=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2427 \let\var=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2428 \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
|
|
|
2429 \let\dots=\indexdummydots
|
|
108
|
2430 \def\@{@}%
|
|
0
|
2431 }
|
|
|
2432
|
|
|
2433 % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
|
|
|
2434 % We must first make another character (@) an escape
|
|
|
2435 % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
|
|
|
2436
|
|
|
2437 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
|
|
|
2438 @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
|
|
|
2439
|
|
|
2440 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
|
|
2441
|
|
|
2442 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize!
|
|
|
2443 % workhorse for all \fooindexes
|
|
|
2444 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there
|
|
|
2445 \def\doind #1#2{%
|
|
108
|
2446 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
|
|
2447 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
|
|
2448 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
|
|
|
2449 \fi
|
|
|
2450 {%
|
|
|
2451 \count255=\lastpenalty
|
|
|
2452 {%
|
|
|
2453 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
|
|
2454 \escapechar=`\\
|
|
|
2455 {%
|
|
175
|
2456 \let\folio=0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
|
|
108
|
2457 \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
|
|
2458 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
|
|
2459 %
|
|
|
2460 % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off
|
|
|
2461 % to get the string to sort by.
|
|
|
2462 {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2}}%
|
|
|
2463 %
|
|
|
2464 % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the
|
|
|
2465 % original text, including any font commands.
|
|
|
2466 \toks0 = {#2}%
|
|
|
2467 \edef\temp{%
|
|
|
2468 \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
|
|
|
2469 \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
|
|
2470 }%
|
|
|
2471 \temp
|
|
|
2472 }%
|
|
|
2473 }%
|
|
|
2474 \penalty\count255
|
|
|
2475 }%
|
|
|
2476 }
|
|
0
|
2477
|
|
|
2478 \def\dosubind #1#2#3{%
|
|
|
2479 {\count10=\lastpenalty %
|
|
|
2480 {\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
|
|
2481 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
2482 {\let\folio=0%
|
|
|
2483 \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}%
|
|
|
2484 %
|
|
|
2485 % Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off,
|
|
|
2486 % to get the string to sort the index by.
|
|
|
2487 {\indexnofonts
|
|
|
2488 \xdef\temp1{#2 #3}%
|
|
|
2489 }%
|
|
|
2490 % Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again,
|
|
|
2491 % this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index.
|
|
|
2492 \edef\temp{%
|
|
|
2493 \write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
|
|
|
2494 \realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}%
|
|
|
2495 \temp }%
|
|
|
2496 }\penalty\count10}}
|
|
|
2497
|
|
|
2498 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
|
|
2499 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
|
|
2500 % or
|
|
|
2501 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|
|
2502 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
|
|
2503 % containing these kinds of lines:
|
|
|
2504 % \initial {c}
|
|
|
2505 % before the first topic whose initial is c
|
|
|
2506 % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
|
|
2507 % for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
|
|
2508 % \primary {topic}
|
|
|
2509 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
|
|
2510 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
|
|
2511 % for each subtopic.
|
|
|
2512
|
|
|
2513 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
|
|
2514 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
|
|
2515
|
|
|
2516 \def\findex {\fnindex}
|
|
|
2517 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
|
|
2518 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
|
|
2519 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
|
|
2520 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
|
|
2521 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
|
|
2522
|
|
|
2523 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
|
|
2524 {\obeylines %
|
|
|
2525 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
|
|
2526 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
|
|
2527
|
|
|
2528 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
|
|
2529
|
|
175
|
2530 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
|
|
2531 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
|
|
2532 %
|
|
0
|
2533 \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
|
|
108
|
2534 \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
|
|
|
2535 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
|
0
|
2536 %
|
|
108
|
2537 \indexfonts \rm
|
|
|
2538 \tolerance = 9500
|
|
|
2539 \indexbreaks
|
|
0
|
2540 %
|
|
|
2541 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
|
290
|
2542 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
|
|
2543 % \initial {@}
|
|
|
2544 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
|
|
2545 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
|
|
2546 \catcode`\@ = 11
|
|
0
|
2547 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
|
|
2548 \ifeof 1
|
|
|
2549 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
|
|
2550 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
|
|
2551 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
|
|
2552 % there is some text.
|
|
|
2553 (Index is nonexistent)
|
|
108
|
2554 \else
|
|
0
|
2555 %
|
|
|
2556 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
|
|
2557 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
|
|
2558 % it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
|
|
2559 \read 1 to \temp
|
|
|
2560 \ifeof 1
|
|
|
2561 (Index is empty)
|
|
|
2562 \else
|
|
175
|
2563 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
|
|
2564 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
|
|
2565 % to make right now.
|
|
|
2566 \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
|
|
|
2567 \catcode`\\ = 0
|
|
|
2568 \escapechar = `\\
|
|
|
2569 \begindoublecolumns
|
|
0
|
2570 \input \jobname.#1s
|
|
175
|
2571 \enddoublecolumns
|
|
0
|
2572 \fi
|
|
|
2573 \fi
|
|
|
2574 \closein 1
|
|
108
|
2575 \endgroup}
|
|
0
|
2576
|
|
|
2577 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
|
|
2578 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
|
|
2579
|
|
|
2580 % Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink.
|
|
|
2581 % \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink.
|
|
|
2582 \newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt
|
|
|
2583
|
|
|
2584 \def\initial #1{%
|
|
|
2585 {\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
|
|
2586 \ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount
|
|
|
2587 \removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi
|
|
|
2588 \line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}}
|
|
|
2589
|
|
|
2590 % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
|
|
|
2591 % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
|
|
|
2592 % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
|
|
2593 %
|
|
|
2594 \def\entry #1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
2595 %
|
|
|
2596 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
|
|
2597 % affect previous text.
|
|
|
2598 \par
|
|
|
2599 %
|
|
|
2600 % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
|
|
2601 \parfillskip = 0in
|
|
|
2602 %
|
|
|
2603 % No extra space above this paragraph.
|
|
|
2604 \parskip = 0in
|
|
|
2605 %
|
|
|
2606 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
|
|
2607 \finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
|
|
2608 %
|
|
|
2609 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
|
|
2610 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
|
|
2611 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
|
|
2612 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
|
|
2613 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
|
|
2614 %
|
|
|
2615 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
|
|
2616 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
|
|
2617 \hangindent=2em
|
|
|
2618 %
|
|
|
2619 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
|
|
2620 % with blank space.
|
|
|
2621 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
|
|
2622 %
|
|
|
2623 % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
|
|
|
2624 % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
|
|
|
2625 \noindent
|
|
|
2626 %
|
|
|
2627 % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
|
|
|
2628 #1%
|
|
108
|
2629 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
|
0
|
2630 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
|
|
2631 % cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
|
|
2632 \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
|
|
|
2633 \def\tempb{#2}%
|
|
|
2634 \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
|
|
|
2635 \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
|
|
|
2636 \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
|
|
|
2637 %
|
|
|
2638 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
|
|
2639 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
|
|
2640 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
|
|
2641 \hfil\penalty50
|
|
|
2642 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
|
|
2643 %
|
|
|
2644 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
|
|
2645 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
|
|
2646 % \hbox ensues.
|
|
|
2647 \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
|
|
|
2648 \fi%
|
|
|
2649 \par
|
|
|
2650 \endgroup}
|
|
|
2651
|
|
|
2652 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
|
|
|
2653 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
|
|
2654 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
|
|
2655
|
|
|
2656 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
|
|
2657
|
|
|
2658 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
|
|
2659
|
|
|
2660 \def\secondary #1#2{
|
|
|
2661 {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
|
|
|
2662 \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
|
|
|
2663 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
|
|
|
2664 }}
|
|
|
2665
|
|
108
|
2666 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
|
|
2667 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
|
|
2668 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
|
|
2669 \catcode`\@=11
|
|
0
|
2670
|
|
|
2671 \newbox\partialpage
|
|
|
2672 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
2673
|
|
108
|
2674 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
|
0
|
2675 % Grab any single-column material above us.
|
|
175
|
2676 \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
|
|
2677 %
|
|
|
2678 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
|
|
2679 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
|
|
2680 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
|
|
2681 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
|
|
2682 % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from
|
|
|
2683 % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page.
|
|
|
2684 % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it
|
|
|
2685 % out. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and
|
|
|
2686 % this will be a no-op.
|
|
|
2687 \unvbox\partialpage
|
|
|
2688 %
|
|
|
2689 % Unvbox the main output page.
|
|
|
2690 \unvbox255
|
|
|
2691 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
|
|
2692 }}%
|
|
0
|
2693 \eject
|
|
|
2694 %
|
|
175
|
2695 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
|
|
2696 \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
|
0
|
2697 %
|
|
|
2698 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
|
|
2699 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
|
|
2700 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
|
|
2701 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
|
175
|
2702 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
|
0
|
2703 %
|
|
|
2704 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
|
|
2705 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
|
|
2706 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
|
175
|
2707 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
|
|
2708 % as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
|
0
|
2709 %
|
|
|
2710 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
|
|
2711 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
|
|
2712 % been clobbered.
|
|
|
2713 %
|
|
|
2714 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
|
|
2715 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
|
|
2716 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
|
|
2717 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
2718 %
|
|
|
2719 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
|
|
2720 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
|
|
2721 \vsize = 2\vsize
|
|
|
2722 }
|
|
70
|
2723 \def\doublecolumnout{%
|
|
108
|
2724 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
|
|
2725 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
|
|
2726 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
|
|
2727 % previous page.
|
|
|
2728 \dimen@=\pageheight \advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage
|
|
175
|
2729 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
|
108
|
2730 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
|
|
2731 \onepageout\pagesofar
|
|
175
|
2732 \unvbox255
|
|
|
2733 \penalty\outputpenalty
|
|
108
|
2734 }
|
|
|
2735 \def\pagesofar{%
|
|
175
|
2736 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
|
108
|
2737 % followed by the two boxes we just split.
|
|
|
2738 \unvbox\partialpage
|
|
|
2739 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
2740 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
|
30
|
2741 }
|
|
108
|
2742 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
|
175
|
2743 \output = {\balancecolumns}\eject % split what we have
|
|
|
2744 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
|
|
2745 %
|
|
108
|
2746 % Back to normal single-column typesetting, but take account of the
|
|
|
2747 % fact that we just accumulated some stuff on the output page.
|
|
175
|
2748 \pagegoal = \vsize
|
|
108
|
2749 }
|
|
|
2750 \def\balancecolumns{%
|
|
175
|
2751 % Called at the end of the double column material.
|
|
|
2752 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}%
|
|
108
|
2753 \dimen@ = \ht0
|
|
|
2754 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
|
|
2755 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
|
|
2756 \divide\dimen@ by 2
|
|
|
2757 \splittopskip = \topskip
|
|
|
2758 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
|
175
|
2759 {\vbadness=10000 \loop
|
|
|
2760 \global\setbox3=\copy0
|
|
108
|
2761 \global\setbox1=\vsplit3 to\dimen@
|
|
175
|
2762 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt
|
|
|
2763 \repeat}%
|
|
108
|
2764 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
|
|
2765 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
|
|
2766 \pagesofar
|
|
|
2767 }
|
|
175
|
2768 \catcode`\@ = \other
|
|
108
|
2769
|
|
|
2770
|
|
0
|
2771 \message{sectioning,}
|
|
|
2772 % Define chapters, sections, etc.
|
|
|
2773
|
|
175
|
2774 \newcount\chapno
|
|
|
2775 \newcount\secno \secno=0
|
|
|
2776 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
|
|
2777 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
|
0
|
2778
|
|
|
2779 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
|
175
|
2780 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
|
0
|
2781 \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
|
|
2782
|
|
175
|
2783 \newwrite\contentsfile
|
|
0
|
2784 % This is called from \setfilename.
|
|
175
|
2785 \def\opencontents{\openout\contentsfile = \jobname.toc }
|
|
0
|
2786
|
|
|
2787 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
|
|
|
2788 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise
|
|
|
2789
|
|
|
2790 \def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{}
|
|
175
|
2791 \def\seccheck#1{\ifnum \pageno<0
|
|
|
2792 \errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}%
|
|
|
2793 \fi}
|
|
0
|
2794
|
|
|
2795 \def\chapternofonts{%
|
|
175
|
2796 \let\rawbackslash=\relax
|
|
|
2797 \let\frenchspacing=\relax
|
|
|
2798 \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
|
|
|
2799 \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
|
|
|
2800 \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
|
|
|
2801 \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
|
|
|
2802 \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
|
|
|
2803 \def\dots{\realbackslash dots}%
|
|
|
2804 \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
|
|
|
2805 \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
|
|
|
2806 \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
|
|
|
2807 \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
|
|
|
2808 \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
|
|
|
2809 \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
|
|
|
2810 \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
|
|
|
2811 \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
|
|
|
2812 \def\bf{\realbackslash bf}%
|
|
|
2813 \def\w{\realbackslash w}%
|
|
|
2814 \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
|
|
|
2815 \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
|
|
|
2816 \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
|
|
|
2817 \def\char{\realbackslash char}%
|
|
|
2818 \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose{##1}}%
|
|
|
2819 \def\code##1{\realbackslash code{##1}}%
|
|
|
2820 \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp{##1}}%
|
|
|
2821 \def\r##1{\realbackslash r{##1}}%
|
|
|
2822 \def\b##1{\realbackslash b{##1}}%
|
|
|
2823 \def\key##1{\realbackslash key{##1}}%
|
|
|
2824 \def\file##1{\realbackslash file{##1}}%
|
|
|
2825 \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd{##1}}%
|
|
|
2826 % These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef.
|
|
|
2827 \def\i##1{\realbackslash i{##1}}%
|
|
|
2828 \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite{##1}}%
|
|
|
2829 \def\var##1{\realbackslash var{##1}}%
|
|
|
2830 \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph{##1}}%
|
|
|
2831 \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn{##1}}%
|
|
0
|
2832 }
|
|
|
2833
|
|
|
2834 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
|
|
2835 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
|
|
|
2836
|
|
|
2837 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
|
|
2838 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
|
|
2839 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
|
|
2840
|
|
|
2841 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
|
|
2842 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
|
|
2843 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
|
|
2844
|
|
|
2845 % Choose a numbered-heading macro
|
|
|
2846 % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
|
|
|
2847 % #2 is text for heading
|
|
|
2848 \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
|
|
2849 \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
|
2850 \chapterzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2851 \or
|
|
|
2852 \seczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2853 \or
|
|
|
2854 \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2855 \or
|
|
|
2856 \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2857 \else
|
|
|
2858 \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
|
|
2859 \chapterzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2860 \else
|
|
|
2861 \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2862 \fi
|
|
|
2863 \fi
|
|
|
2864 }
|
|
|
2865
|
|
|
2866 % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
|
|
|
2867 \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
|
|
2868 \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
|
2869 \appendixzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2870 \or
|
|
|
2871 \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2872 \or
|
|
|
2873 \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2874 \or
|
|
|
2875 \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2876 \else
|
|
|
2877 \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
|
|
2878 \appendixzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2879 \else
|
|
|
2880 \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2881 \fi
|
|
|
2882 \fi
|
|
|
2883 }
|
|
|
2884
|
|
|
2885 % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
|
|
|
2886 \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
|
|
2887 \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
|
2888 \unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2889 \or
|
|
|
2890 \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2891 \or
|
|
|
2892 \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2893 \or
|
|
|
2894 \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2895 \else
|
|
|
2896 \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
|
|
2897 \unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
|
|
2898 \else
|
|
|
2899 \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
2900 \fi
|
|
|
2901 \fi
|
|
|
2902 }
|
|
|
2903
|
|
|
2904
|
|
|
2905 \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
|
|
|
2906 \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
|
|
|
2907 \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
|
|
2908 \def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}%
|
|
|
2909 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
2910 \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}%
|
|
|
2911 \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
|
|
|
2912 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
2913 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
|
|
2914 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
|
|
|
2915 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
|
|
|
2916 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|
|
2917 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
2918 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
2919 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
2920 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
2921 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
2922 \donoderef %
|
|
|
2923 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|
|
2924 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|
|
2925 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
2926 }}
|
|
|
2927
|
|
|
2928 \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
|
|
|
2929 \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
|
|
|
2930 \def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}%
|
|
|
2931 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
2932 \global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}%
|
|
|
2933 \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
|
|
|
2934 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
2935 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
|
|
2936 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|
|
2937 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
2938 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
2939 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
2940 {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
2941 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
2942 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
2943 \appendixnoderef %
|
|
|
2944 \global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
|
|
2945 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
|
|
2946 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
|
|
2947 }}
|
|
|
2948
|
|
108
|
2949 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
|
|
2950 \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
|
|
|
2951 \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
|
|
|
2952
|
|
0
|
2953 \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
|
|
2954 \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
|
|
2955 \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
|
|
2956 \def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}%
|
|
|
2957 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
2958 %
|
|
|
2959 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
|
|
2960 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
|
|
2961 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
|
|
2962 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
|
|
2963 % to be executed, not expanded).
|
|
|
2964 %
|
|
|
2965 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
|
|
2966 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
|
|
2967 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
|
|
2968 % simply yielding the contents of the <toks register>.
|
|
|
2969 \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
|
|
2970 %
|
|
|
2971 \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
|
|
|
2972 \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
2973 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
2974 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
2975 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
2976 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
2977 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
2978 \unnumbnoderef %
|
|
|
2979 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
|
|
2980 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
|
|
2981 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
2982 }}
|
|
|
2983
|
|
|
2984 \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
|
|
|
2985 \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
|
|
2986 \def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}%
|
|
|
2987 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
|
|
2988 \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
|
|
|
2989 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
2990 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
0
|
2991 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry %
|
|
175
|
2992 {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
2993 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
2994 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
2995 \donoderef %
|
|
|
2996 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
2997 }}
|
|
|
2998
|
|
108
|
2999 \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
|
0
|
3000 \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
|
|
3001 \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
|
|
3002 \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}%
|
|
|
3003 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
|
|
3004 \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
|
|
|
3005 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3006 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
0
|
3007 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry %
|
|
175
|
3008 {\the\toks0}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
3009 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3010 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3011 \appendixnoderef %
|
|
|
3012 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3013 }}
|
|
|
3014
|
|
|
3015 \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
|
|
|
3016 \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
|
|
3017 \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}%
|
|
|
3018 \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3019 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3020 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3021 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
3022 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3023 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3024 \unnumbnoderef %
|
|
|
3025 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3026 }}
|
|
|
3027
|
|
|
3028 \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3029 \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
|
|
3030 \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}%
|
|
|
3031 \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3032 \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
|
|
3033 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3034 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
0
|
3035 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry %
|
|
175
|
3036 {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
3037 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3038 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3039 \donoderef %
|
|
|
3040 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3041 }}
|
|
|
3042
|
|
|
3043 \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3044 \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
|
|
3045 \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}%
|
|
|
3046 \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3047 \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
|
|
3048 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3049 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
0
|
3050 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry %
|
|
175
|
3051 {\the\toks0}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
3052 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3053 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3054 \appendixnoderef %
|
|
|
3055 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3056 }}
|
|
|
3057
|
|
|
3058 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3059 \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
|
|
3060 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}%
|
|
108
|
3061 \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
0
|
3062 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3063 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3064 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
3065 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3066 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3067 \unnumbnoderef %
|
|
|
3068 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3069 }}
|
|
|
3070
|
|
|
3071 \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3072 \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
|
|
3073 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}%
|
|
|
3074 \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3075 \subsubsecheading {#1}
|
|
|
3076 {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
|
3077 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3078 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3079 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}
|
|
0
|
3080 {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}
|
|
|
3081 {\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
|
3082 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3083 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3084 \donoderef %
|
|
|
3085 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3086 }}
|
|
|
3087
|
|
|
3088 \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3089 \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
|
|
3090 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}%
|
|
|
3091 \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3092 \subsubsecheading {#1}
|
|
|
3093 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
|
3094 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3095 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3096 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
0
|
3097 {\appendixletter}
|
|
|
3098 {\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
|
3099 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3100 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3101 \appendixnoderef %
|
|
|
3102 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3103 }}
|
|
|
3104
|
|
|
3105 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3106 \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
|
|
3107 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}%
|
|
108
|
3108 \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
0
|
3109 {\chapternofonts%
|
|
175
|
3110 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3111 \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
0
|
3112 \escapechar=`\\%
|
|
|
3113 \write \contentsfile \temp %
|
|
|
3114 \unnumbnoderef %
|
|
|
3115 \penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3116 }}
|
|
|
3117
|
|
|
3118 % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
|
|
|
3119 % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
|
|
|
3120 \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
|
|
3121 \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
|
|
3122 \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
|
|
|
3123 \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3124 \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3125
|
|
|
3126 \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
|
|
|
3127 \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
|
|
|
3128 \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3129 \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3130
|
|
|
3131 \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
|
|
|
3132 \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
|
|
|
3133 \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
|
|
|
3134 \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
|
|
|
3135
|
|
|
3136 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
|
|
3137 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
|
|
3138 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
|
|
3139 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|
|
3140 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|
|
3141 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
3142
|
|
|
3143 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
|
|
3144
|
|
|
3145 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and
|
|
|
3146 % such:
|
|
108
|
3147 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
|
|
3148 % overlong headings to fold.
|
|
|
3149 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
|
|
3150 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
|
0
|
3151 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
|
|
3152 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
|
|
3153
|
|
|
3154
|
|
|
3155 \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
|
|
|
3156 \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
|
|
|
3157 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
|
|
3158 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3159 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
|
3160 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
|
|
3161
|
|
|
3162 \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
|
|
3163 \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
|
|
|
3164 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3165 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
|
3166 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
|
|
3167
|
|
108
|
3168 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
|
|
3169 \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
|
|
|
3170 \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
|
|
|
3171 \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
|
|
0
|
3172
|
|
|
3173 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
|
|
3174 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
|
|
3175 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
|
|
3176
|
|
|
3177 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
|
|
3178 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
|
|
3179
|
|
|
3180 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
3181
|
|
|
3182 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
|
|
3183 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
|
|
3184
|
|
108
|
3185 \newskip\chapheadingskip
|
|
0
|
3186
|
|
|
3187 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
|
|
3188 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|
|
3189 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
|
|
|
3190
|
|
|
3191 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
3192
|
|
|
3193 \def\CHAPPAGoff{
|
|
108
|
3194 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
0
|
3195 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
|
|
3196 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
|
|
3197
|
|
|
3198 \def\CHAPPAGon{
|
|
108
|
3199 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
0
|
3200 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
|
|
3201 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
|
|
3202 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
|
|
3203
|
|
|
3204 \def\CHAPPAGodd{
|
|
108
|
3205 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
0
|
3206 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|
|
3207 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|
|
3208 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
|
|
3209
|
|
|
3210 \CHAPPAGon
|
|
|
3211
|
|
|
3212 \def\CHAPFplain{
|
|
|
3213 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
|
|
108
|
3214 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
|
|
|
3215 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
|
|
|
3216
|
|
|
3217 % Plain chapter opening.
|
|
|
3218 % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
|
|
|
3219 \def\chfplain#1#2{%
|
|
0
|
3220 \pchapsepmacro
|
|
|
3221 {%
|
|
108
|
3222 \chapfonts \rm
|
|
|
3223 \def\chapnum{#2}%
|
|
|
3224 \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
|
|
3225 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
|
|
3226 \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
|
|
3227 \unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
|
0
|
3228 }%
|
|
108
|
3229 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
|
|
3230 \nobreak
|
|
0
|
3231 }
|
|
|
3232
|
|
108
|
3233 % Plain opening for unnumbered.
|
|
|
3234 \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
|
|
|
3235
|
|
|
3236 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
|
|
3237 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
|
|
3238 \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
|
|
|
3239 \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
|
|
|
3240 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
|
|
3241 \leftskip = \rightskip
|
|
|
3242 \parfillskip = 0pt
|
|
|
3243 }%
|
|
|
3244 \chfplain{#1}{}%
|
|
|
3245 }}
|
|
|
3246
|
|
0
|
3247 \CHAPFplain % The default
|
|
|
3248
|
|
|
3249 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
|
|
3250 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3251 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
|
3252 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3253 }
|
|
|
3254
|
|
|
3255 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
|
|
3256 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
|
|
3257 \par\penalty 5000 %
|
|
|
3258 }
|
|
|
3259
|
|
108
|
3260 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
|
|
3261 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3262 \parindent=0pt
|
|
|
3263 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 %
|
|
|
3264 }
|
|
|
3265
|
|
0
|
3266 \def\CHAPFopen{
|
|
|
3267 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
|
108
|
3268 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
|
|
|
3269 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
|
|
3270
|
|
|
3271
|
|
|
3272 % Section titles.
|
|
|
3273 \newskip\secheadingskip
|
|
70
|
3274 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
|
|
108
|
3275 \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
|
|
|
3276 \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
|
|
|
3277
|
|
|
3278 % Subsection titles.
|
|
|
3279 \newskip \subsecheadingskip
|
|
|
3280 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
|
|
|
3281 \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
|
|
|
3282 \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
|
|
|
3283
|
|
|
3284 % Subsubsection titles.
|
|
|
3285 \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
|
|
|
3286 \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
|
|
|
3287 \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
|
|
|
3288 \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
|
|
|
3289
|
|
|
3290
|
|
|
3291 % Print any size section title.
|
|
175
|
3292 %
|
|
108
|
3293 % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
|
|
|
3294 % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
|
|
|
3295 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
3296 {%
|
|
|
3297 \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
|
|
|
3298 \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
|
|
|
3299 }%
|
|
|
3300 {%
|
|
|
3301 % Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
|
|
3302 \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
|
|
|
3303 %
|
|
|
3304 % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
|
|
|
3305 \def\secnum{#2}%
|
|
|
3306 \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
|
|
3307 %
|
|
|
3308 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
|
|
3309 \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
|
|
|
3310 \unhbox0 #3}%
|
|
|
3311 }%
|
|
|
3312 \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
|
|
|
3313 }
|
|
0
|
3314
|
|
|
3315
|
|
|
3316 \message{toc printing,}
|
|
|
3317 % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
|
|
|
3318 % to \contentsfile.
|
|
|
3319
|
|
|
3320 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
|
|
3321 \def\startcontents#1{%
|
|
108
|
3322 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
|
|
3323 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
|
|
3324 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
|
|
3325 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
|
|
3326 \contentsalignmacro
|
|
0
|
3327 \immediate\closeout \contentsfile
|
|
|
3328 \ifnum \pageno>0
|
|
108
|
3329 \pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages.
|
|
0
|
3330 \fi
|
|
|
3331 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
|
|
3332 % It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
|
|
3333 \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
|
|
108
|
3334 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
|
0
|
3335 \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
|
|
175
|
3336 % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
|
|
|
3337 % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
|
|
|
3338 %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
|
|
0
|
3339 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
|
|
3340 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
|
|
3341 }
|
|
|
3342
|
|
|
3343
|
|
|
3344 % Normal (long) toc.
|
|
|
3345 \outer\def\contents{%
|
|
|
3346 \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}%
|
|
|
3347 \input \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3348 \endgroup
|
|
|
3349 \vfill \eject
|
|
|
3350 }
|
|
|
3351
|
|
|
3352 % And just the chapters.
|
|
|
3353 \outer\def\summarycontents{%
|
|
|
3354 \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}%
|
|
|
3355 %
|
|
|
3356 \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
|
|
|
3357 \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
|
|
|
3358 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
|
|
3359 \secfonts
|
|
|
3360 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
|
|
|
3361 \rm
|
|
108
|
3362 \hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
|
0
|
3363 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
|
|
3364 \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
|
|
|
3365 \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
3366 \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
|
|
|
3367 \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
3368 \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
|
|
|
3369 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
3370 \input \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3371 \endgroup
|
|
|
3372 \vfill \eject
|
|
|
3373 }
|
|
|
3374 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
|
|
3375
|
|
|
3376 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
|
|
3377 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
|
|
3378 % The last argument is the page number.
|
|
|
3379 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
|
|
3380
|
|
|
3381 % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
|
|
|
3382 \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
|
|
|
3383
|
|
|
3384 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
|
|
|
3385 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
3386 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
|
|
|
3387 }
|
|
|
3388
|
|
|
3389 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
|
|
3390 % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
|
|
3391 % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
|
|
|
3392 % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
|
|
|
3393 % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
|
|
|
3394 \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
|
|
|
3395 \newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
|
|
|
3396
|
|
|
3397 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
|
|
3398 % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
|
|
|
3399 % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
|
|
|
3400 \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
|
|
|
3401 \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
|
|
|
3402 %
|
|
|
3403 % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
|
|
3404 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
|
|
3405 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
|
108
|
3406 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
|
0
|
3407 \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
|
|
|
3408 \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
|
|
|
3409 }
|
|
|
3410
|
|
|
3411 \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3412 \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
|
|
|
3413
|
|
|
3414 % Sections.
|
|
|
3415 \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
|
3416 \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3417
|
|
|
3418 % Subsections.
|
|
|
3419 \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
|
|
|
3420 \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3421
|
|
|
3422 % And subsubsections.
|
|
|
3423 \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
|
|
3424 \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
|
|
|
3425 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3426
|
|
|
3427 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
|
|
3428 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
|
|
|
3429
|
|
|
3430 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
|
|
3431 % page number.
|
|
|
3432 %
|
|
108
|
3433 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
|
0
|
3434 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
|
|
3435 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
|
108
|
3436 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
|
0
|
3437 \begingroup
|
|
|
3438 \chapentryfonts
|
|
|
3439 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
|
|
3440 \endgroup
|
|
108
|
3441 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
|
0
|
3442 }
|
|
|
3443
|
|
|
3444 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3445 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
|
|
3446 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
|
|
3447 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3448
|
|
|
3449 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3450 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
|
|
3451 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
|
|
3452 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3453
|
|
|
3454 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3455 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
|
|
3456 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
|
|
3457 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3458
|
|
|
3459 % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
|
|
|
3460 % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
|
|
|
3461 % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
|
|
|
3462 % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
|
|
|
3463 \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
108
|
3464 \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
|
|
290
|
3465 % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
|
|
|
3466 % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
|
|
|
3467 % have to do the usual translation tricks.
|
|
|
3468 \entry{#1}{#2}%
|
|
0
|
3469 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3470
|
|
|
3471 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
|
|
3472 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
|
|
3473
|
|
|
3474 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|
|
3475 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|
|
3476
|
|
|
3477 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
|
|
3478 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|
|
3479 \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
|
|
3480 \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
|
|
3481
|
|
|
3482
|
|
|
3483 \message{environments,}
|
|
|
3484
|
|
|
3485 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
|
|
|
3486 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
|
|
3487 % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
|
|
|
3488 \newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox
|
|
|
3489 \newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox
|
|
|
3490 \newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox
|
|
|
3491
|
|
|
3492 %{\tentt
|
|
|
3493 %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
|
|
|
3494 %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
|
|
|
3495 %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
|
|
|
3496 %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
|
|
|
3497 % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
|
|
|
3498 %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
|
|
|
3499 % depth .1ex\hfil}
|
|
|
3500 %}
|
|
|
3501
|
|
108
|
3502 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
|
0
|
3503 \def\point{$\star$}
|
|
|
3504 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3505 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3506 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3507 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3508
|
|
|
3509 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
|
|
3510 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
|
|
3511 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
|
|
3512 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
|
|
3513 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
|
|
3514
|
|
|
3515 \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
|
|
3516 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
|
|
3517 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
|
|
3518 \vbox{
|
|
|
3519 \hrule height\dimen2
|
|
|
3520 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
|
|
3521 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
|
|
3522 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
|
|
3523 \hrule height\dimen2}
|
|
|
3524 \hfil}
|
|
|
3525
|
|
|
3526 % The @error{} command.
|
|
|
3527 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
|
|
3528
|
|
|
3529 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
|
|
3530 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
|
|
3531 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
|
|
3532
|
|
|
3533 \def\tex{\begingroup
|
|
290
|
3534 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
|
|
3535 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
|
|
3536 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
|
|
|
3537 \catcode `\%=14
|
|
|
3538 \catcode 43=12 % plus
|
|
|
3539 \catcode`\"=12
|
|
|
3540 \catcode`\==12
|
|
|
3541 \catcode`\|=12
|
|
|
3542 \catcode`\<=12
|
|
|
3543 \catcode`\>=12
|
|
|
3544 \escapechar=`\\
|
|
|
3545 %
|
|
|
3546 \let\b=\ptexb
|
|
|
3547 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
|
|
3548 \let\c=\ptexc
|
|
|
3549 \let\,=\ptexcomma
|
|
|
3550 \let\.=\ptexdot
|
|
|
3551 \let\dots=\ptexdots
|
|
|
3552 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
|
|
3553 \let\!=\ptexexclam
|
|
|
3554 \let\i=\ptexi
|
|
|
3555 \let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
|
|
3556 \let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
|
|
3557 \let\*=\ptexstar
|
|
|
3558 \let\t=\ptext
|
|
|
3559 %
|
|
|
3560 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
|
|
3561 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
|
|
3562 \def\@{@}%
|
|
0
|
3563 \let\Etex=\endgroup}
|
|
|
3564
|
|
|
3565 % Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
|
|
|
3566 % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
|
|
|
3567 % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
|
|
3568
|
|
|
3569 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
|
|
3570 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
|
|
3571
|
|
|
3572 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
|
|
3573 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
|
|
3574 % have any width.
|
|
|
3575 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
|
|
3576
|
|
|
3577 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
|
|
3578 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
|
|
3579 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
|
|
3580 % should produce a line of output anyway.
|
|
|
3581 %
|
|
|
3582 {\obeyspaces %
|
|
|
3583 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
|
|
|
3584
|
|
|
3585 % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
|
|
|
3586 % for use in \parsearg.
|
|
|
3587 {\sepspaces%
|
|
|
3588 \global\let\obeyedspace= }
|
|
|
3589
|
|
|
3590 % This space is always present above and below environments.
|
|
|
3591 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
|
|
3592
|
|
|
3593 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
|
|
3594 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
|
|
3595 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
|
|
3596 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
|
|
|
3597 %
|
|
|
3598 \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
|
|
3599 \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
|
|
3600 \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
|
|
|
3601
|
|
|
3602 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
|
|
3603
|
|
|
3604 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
|
|
|
3605 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
|
|
3606
|
|
|
3607 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
|
|
3608 % \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument
|
|
|
3609 \font\circle=lcircle10
|
|
|
3610 \newdimen\circthick
|
|
|
3611 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
|
|
3612 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
|
|
3613 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
|
|
3614 %
|
|
|
3615 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
|
|
3616 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
|
|
3617 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
|
|
3618 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
|
|
3619 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|
108
|
3620 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
|
|
3621 \hskip\rskip}}
|
|
0
|
3622 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|
108
|
3623 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
|
|
3624 \hskip\rskip}}
|
|
0
|
3625 %
|
|
|
3626 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
|
|
3627
|
|
|
3628 \long\def\cartouche{%
|
|
|
3629 \begingroup
|
|
108
|
3630 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
|
|
3631 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
|
|
|
3632 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
|
|
3633 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
|
|
3634 \cartouter=\hsize
|
|
|
3635 \advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
|
|
3636 % side, and for 6pt waste from
|
|
|
3637 % each corner char
|
|
|
3638 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
|
|
3639 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
|
|
3640 \let\nonarrowing=\comment
|
|
|
3641 \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
3642 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
|
|
3643 \carttop
|
|
|
3644 \hbox\bgroup
|
|
|
3645 \hskip\lskip
|
|
|
3646 \vrule\kern3pt
|
|
|
3647 \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
3648 \hsize=\cartinner
|
|
|
3649 \kern3pt
|
|
|
3650 \begingroup
|
|
|
3651 \baselineskip=\normbskip
|
|
|
3652 \lineskip=\normlskip
|
|
|
3653 \parskip=\normpskip
|
|
|
3654 \vskip -\parskip
|
|
0
|
3655 \def\Ecartouche{%
|
|
108
|
3656 \endgroup
|
|
|
3657 \kern3pt
|
|
|
3658 \egroup
|
|
|
3659 \kern3pt\vrule
|
|
|
3660 \hskip\rskip
|
|
|
3661 \egroup
|
|
|
3662 \cartbot
|
|
|
3663 \egroup
|
|
0
|
3664 \endgroup
|
|
|
3665 }}
|
|
|
3666
|
|
|
3667
|
|
|
3668 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
|
|
3669 % inside a group.
|
|
|
3670 \def\nonfillstart{%
|
|
|
3671 \aboveenvbreak
|
|
|
3672 \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
|
|
|
3673 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
|
|
3674 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
|
|
3675 \singlespace
|
|
|
3676 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
|
|
3677 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
|
|
3678 \parskip = 0pt
|
|
|
3679 \parindent = 0pt
|
|
|
3680 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
|
|
3681 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
|
|
|
3682 % at next level down.
|
|
|
3683 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|
|
3684 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
3685 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
|
|
3686 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
|
|
3687 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
|
|
3688 \fi
|
|
|
3689 }
|
|
|
3690
|
|
|
3691 % To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph
|
|
|
3692 % (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we
|
|
|
3693 % keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue
|
|
|
3694 % will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the
|
|
|
3695 % document, after the environment.
|
|
|
3696 %
|
|
|
3697 \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
3698
|
|
|
3699 \def\lisp{\begingroup
|
|
|
3700 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
3701 \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3702 \tt
|
|
175
|
3703 % Make @kbd do something special, if requested.
|
|
|
3704 \let\kbdfont\kbdexamplefont
|
|
0
|
3705 \rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font
|
|
|
3706 \gobble
|
|
|
3707 }
|
|
|
3708
|
|
|
3709 % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the
|
|
|
3710 % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
|
|
|
3711 %
|
|
|
3712 % We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the
|
|
|
3713 % return following the @example (or whatever) command.
|
|
|
3714 %
|
|
|
3715 \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
|
|
3716 \def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
|
|
3717 \def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
|
|
3718
|
|
|
3719 % @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook
|
|
|
3720 % command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
|
|
3721 %
|
|
|
3722 \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
|
|
|
3723 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
3724 \let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3725 \let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3726 %
|
|
108
|
3727 % Smaller fonts for small examples.
|
|
0
|
3728 \indexfonts \tt
|
|
|
3729 \rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt)
|
|
|
3730 \gobble
|
|
|
3731 }
|
|
|
3732
|
|
|
3733 % This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font.
|
|
|
3734 %
|
|
|
3735 \def\display{\begingroup
|
|
|
3736 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
3737 \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3738 \gobble
|
|
|
3739 }
|
|
|
3740
|
|
|
3741 % This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
|
|
3742 %
|
|
|
3743 \def\format{\begingroup
|
|
|
3744 \let\nonarrowing = t
|
|
|
3745 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
3746 \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3747 \gobble
|
|
|
3748 }
|
|
|
3749
|
|
|
3750 % @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright.
|
|
|
3751 %
|
|
|
3752 \def\flushleft{\begingroup
|
|
|
3753 \let\nonarrowing = t
|
|
|
3754 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
3755 \let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3756 \gobble
|
|
|
3757 }
|
|
|
3758 \def\flushright{\begingroup
|
|
|
3759 \let\nonarrowing = t
|
|
|
3760 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
3761 \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
3762 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
|
|
3763 \gobble}
|
|
|
3764
|
|
|
3765 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
|
|
3766 % and narrows the margins.
|
|
|
3767 %
|
|
|
3768 \def\quotation{%
|
|
|
3769 \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
|
|
|
3770 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
|
|
3771 \singlespace
|
|
|
3772 \parindent=0pt
|
|
|
3773 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
|
|
3774 % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
|
|
|
3775 \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
|
|
|
3776 %
|
|
|
3777 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
|
|
3778 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|
|
3779 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
3780 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
3781 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
3782 \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
|
|
3783 \fi
|
|
|
3784 }
|
|
|
3785
|
|
|
3786 \message{defuns,}
|
|
|
3787 % Define formatter for defuns
|
|
|
3788 % First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
|
|
|
3789 \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
3790
|
|
|
3791 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
|
|
3792 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
|
|
3793 \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
|
|
|
3794 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
|
|
3795
|
|
|
3796 \newcount\parencount
|
|
|
3797 % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
|
|
|
3798 % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
|
|
|
3799 \def\activeparens{%
|
|
|
3800 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
|
|
|
3801 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
|
|
|
3802
|
|
|
3803 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
|
|
3804 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
|
|
3805
|
|
|
3806 {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
|
|
|
3807
|
|
|
3808 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
|
|
3809 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
|
|
3810 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
|
|
3811 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
|
|
3812 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
|
|
3813
|
|
|
3814 \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
|
|
|
3815 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
|
|
3816 % This is used to turn on special parens
|
|
|
3817 % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
|
|
|
3818 \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
|
|
|
3819
|
|
|
3820 % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
|
|
|
3821 % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
|
|
175
|
3822 \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
|
|
|
3823 \global\advance\parencount by 1
|
|
|
3824 }
|
|
0
|
3825 %
|
|
|
3826 % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
|
|
|
3827 \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
|
|
3828 %
|
|
|
3829 \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
|
|
175
|
3830 % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
|
|
|
3831 \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
|
|
|
3832 \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
|
|
0
|
3833 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
|
|
3834 \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
|
|
|
3835 %
|
|
|
3836 \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
|
|
|
3837 } % End of definition inside \activeparens
|
|
|
3838 %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
|
|
|
3839 %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
|
|
175
|
3840 \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
|
|
3841 \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
|
|
|
3842 \def\ampnr{\&}
|
|
|
3843 \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
|
|
|
3844 \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
|
|
0
|
3845
|
|
|
3846 % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
|
|
|
3847 % #1 should be the function name.
|
|
|
3848 % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
|
|
|
3849
|
|
|
3850 \def\defname #1#2{%
|
|
|
3851 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
|
|
|
3852 % outside the @def...
|
|
|
3853 \dimen2=\leftskip
|
|
|
3854 \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3855 \dimen3=\rightskip
|
|
|
3856 \advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3857 \noindent %
|
|
|
3858 \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
|
|
|
3859 \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
|
|
|
3860 \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
|
|
|
3861 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 %
|
|
|
3862 % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
|
|
|
3863 % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
|
|
|
3864 % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
|
|
|
3865 {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
|
|
|
3866 % so that \rightline will obey them.
|
|
|
3867 \advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3
|
|
|
3868 \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}%
|
|
|
3869 % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
|
|
|
3870 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
|
|
3871 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3872 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3873 {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
|
|
|
3874 }
|
|
|
3875
|
|
|
3876 % Actually process the body of a definition
|
|
|
3877 % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
|
|
|
3878 % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
|
|
|
3879 % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
|
|
|
3880 % such as \defunheader.
|
|
|
3881
|
|
|
3882 \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
|
|
|
3883 \medbreak %
|
|
|
3884 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
3885 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
3886 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
3887 \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
|
|
|
3888 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
3889 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
3890 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3891 \begingroup %
|
|
|
3892 \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
|
|
|
3893 \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
|
|
|
3894
|
|
|
3895 \def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
3896 \medbreak %
|
|
|
3897 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
3898 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
3899 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
3900 \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
|
|
3901 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
3902 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
3903 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3904 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
|
|
|
3905
|
|
|
3906 \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
3907 \medbreak %
|
|
|
3908 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
3909 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
3910 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
3911 \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
|
|
3912 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
|
|
3913 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
3914 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
3915 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3916 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
|
|
|
3917
|
|
|
3918 % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
|
|
|
3919 % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
|
|
|
3920 % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
|
|
|
3921
|
|
|
3922 \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
|
|
|
3923 \medbreak %
|
|
|
3924 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
3925 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
3926 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
3927 \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
|
|
|
3928 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
3929 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
3930 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3931 \begingroup %
|
|
|
3932 \catcode 61=\active %
|
|
|
3933 \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
|
|
|
3934
|
|
|
3935 % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
|
|
|
3936 % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
|
|
175
|
3937 %
|
|
0
|
3938 \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
3939 \begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
3940 \medbreak %
|
|
|
3941 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
3942 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
3943 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
3944 \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
|
|
3945 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
3946 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
3947 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3948 \begingroup\obeylines
|
|
|
3949 }
|
|
|
3950
|
|
|
3951 \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
|
|
|
3952 \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
|
|
3953 \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
|
|
|
3954 }
|
|
|
3955
|
|
|
3956 % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
|
|
|
3957 % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
|
|
|
3958 % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
|
|
|
3959 % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
|
|
|
3960 %
|
|
|
3961 % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
|
|
|
3962 % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
|
|
|
3963 % won't strip off the braces.
|
|
|
3964 %
|
|
|
3965 \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
|
|
|
3966 \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
|
|
3967 \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
|
|
|
3968 }
|
|
|
3969
|
|
|
3970 % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
|
|
175
|
3971 % braces (if any). That's what this does.
|
|
|
3972 %
|
|
|
3973 \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
|
|
0
|
3974
|
|
|
3975 % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
|
|
|
3976 % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
|
|
|
3977 % (which might be empty) the arguments.
|
|
175
|
3978 %
|
|
0
|
3979 \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
|
|
175
|
3980 #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
|
|
0
|
3981 }%
|
|
|
3982
|
|
|
3983 \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
3984 \medbreak %
|
|
|
3985 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
3986 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
3987 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
3988 \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
|
|
3989 \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
|
|
3990 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
3991 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
3992 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
3993 \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
|
|
|
3994
|
|
|
3995 % Split up #2 at the first space token.
|
|
|
3996 % call #1 with two arguments:
|
|
|
3997 % the first is all of #2 before the space token,
|
|
|
3998 % the second is all of #2 after that space token.
|
|
|
3999 % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
|
|
|
4000 % and the second is passed as empty.
|
|
|
4001
|
|
|
4002 {\obeylines
|
|
|
4003 \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
|
|
|
4004 \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
|
|
|
4005 \ifx\relax #3%
|
|
|
4006 #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
|
|
|
4007
|
|
|
4008 % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
|
|
|
4009
|
|
|
4010 % Define @defun.
|
|
|
4011
|
|
|
4012 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
|
|
|
4013 % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
|
|
4014
|
|
|
4015 \def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
|
|
|
4016 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
|
|
4017 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
|
|
4018 \hyphenchar\tensl=0
|
|
|
4019 #1%
|
|
|
4020 \hyphenchar\tensl=45
|
|
175
|
4021 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
|
|
0
|
4022 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4023 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
4024 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000%
|
|
|
4025 }
|
|
|
4026
|
|
|
4027 \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
|
|
|
4028 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
|
|
4029 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
|
|
4030 % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
|
|
|
4031 \boldbraxnoamp
|
|
|
4032 \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
|
|
|
4033 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4034 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
4035 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000%
|
|
|
4036 }
|
|
|
4037
|
|
|
4038 % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
|
|
|
4039
|
|
|
4040 % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
|
|
|
4041
|
|
|
4042 \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
|
|
|
4043
|
|
|
4044 \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
|
4045 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4046 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4047 }
|
|
|
4048
|
|
|
4049 % @defun == @deffn Function
|
|
|
4050
|
|
|
4051 \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
|
|
|
4052
|
|
|
4053 \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4054 \begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
|
|
|
4055 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4056 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4057 }
|
|
|
4058
|
|
|
4059 % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
|
|
4060
|
|
|
4061 \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
|
|
|
4062
|
|
|
4063 % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
|
|
|
4064 \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
|
|
|
4065 % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
|
|
|
4066 \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
|
|
|
4067 \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4068 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}%
|
|
|
4069 \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4070 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4071 }
|
|
|
4072
|
|
|
4073 % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
|
|
4074
|
|
|
4075 \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
|
|
|
4076
|
|
|
4077 % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
|
|
|
4078 % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
|
|
|
4079 \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
|
|
|
4080
|
|
|
4081 % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
|
|
|
4082 \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
|
|
|
4083 % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
|
|
|
4084 \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
|
|
|
4085 \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4086 \begingroup
|
|
|
4087 \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
|
|
|
4088 % at least some C++ text from working
|
|
|
4089 \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
|
|
|
4090 \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4091 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4092 }
|
|
|
4093
|
|
|
4094 % @defmac == @deffn Macro
|
|
|
4095
|
|
|
4096 \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
|
|
|
4097
|
|
|
4098 \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4099 \begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
|
|
|
4100 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4101 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4102 }
|
|
|
4103
|
|
|
4104 % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
|
|
|
4105
|
|
|
4106 \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
|
|
|
4107
|
|
|
4108 \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4109 \begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
|
|
|
4110 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4111 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4112 }
|
|
|
4113
|
|
|
4114 % This definition is run if you use @defunx
|
|
|
4115 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
|
|
|
4116
|
|
|
4117 \def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4118 \def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4119 \def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4120 \def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4121 \def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
|
|
175
|
4122 \def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
|
|
0
|
4123 \def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4124
|
|
|
4125 % @defmethod, and so on
|
|
|
4126
|
|
|
4127 % @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument
|
|
|
4128
|
|
|
4129 \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
|
|
|
4130 \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
|
|
|
4131
|
|
|
4132 \def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4133 \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4134 \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
|
|
|
4135 \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4136 }
|
|
|
4137
|
|
175
|
4138 % @deftypemethod foo-class return-type foo-method args
|
|
|
4139 %
|
|
|
4140 \def\deftypemethod{%
|
|
|
4141 \defmethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
|
|
|
4142 %
|
|
|
4143 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
|
|
|
4144 \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
|
|
|
4145 \deftypefnheaderx{Method on #1}{#2}#3 #4\relax
|
|
|
4146 }
|
|
|
4147
|
|
0
|
4148 % @defmethod == @defop Method
|
|
|
4149
|
|
|
4150 \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
|
|
|
4151
|
|
|
4152 \def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4153 \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index
|
|
|
4154 \begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}%
|
|
|
4155 \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4156 }
|
|
|
4157
|
|
|
4158 % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
|
|
|
4159
|
|
|
4160 \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
|
|
|
4161 \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
|
|
|
4162
|
|
|
4163 \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4164 \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4165 \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
|
|
|
4166 \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4167 }
|
|
|
4168
|
|
|
4169 % @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
|
|
|
4170
|
|
|
4171 \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
|
|
|
4172
|
|
|
4173 \def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4174 \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4175 \begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
|
|
|
4176 \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4177 }
|
|
|
4178
|
|
|
4179 % These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
|
|
|
4180 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
|
|
|
4181
|
|
|
4182 \def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4183 \def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4184 \def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4185 \def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4186
|
|
|
4187 % Now @defvar
|
|
|
4188
|
|
|
4189 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
|
|
|
4190 % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
|
|
|
4191 % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
|
|
4192 \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
|
|
|
4193 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4194 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000}
|
|
|
4195
|
|
|
4196 % @defvr Counter foo-count
|
|
|
4197
|
|
|
4198 \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
|
|
|
4199
|
|
|
4200 \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
|
4201 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
|
|
4202
|
|
|
4203 % @defvar == @defvr Variable
|
|
|
4204
|
|
|
4205 \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
|
|
|
4206
|
|
|
4207 \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4208 \begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
|
|
|
4209 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4210 }
|
|
|
4211
|
|
|
4212 % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
|
|
|
4213
|
|
|
4214 \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
|
|
|
4215
|
|
|
4216 \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4217 \begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
|
|
|
4218 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4219 }
|
|
|
4220
|
|
|
4221 % @deftypevar int foobar
|
|
|
4222
|
|
|
4223 \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
|
|
|
4224
|
|
175
|
4225 % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
|
|
|
4226 % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
|
|
0
|
4227 \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
|
|
175
|
4228 \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
|
|
0
|
4229 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}%
|
|
|
4230 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4231 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000
|
|
|
4232 \endgroup}
|
|
175
|
4233 \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
|
|
0
|
4234
|
|
|
4235 % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
|
|
|
4236
|
|
|
4237 \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
|
|
|
4238
|
|
175
|
4239 \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
|
|
0
|
4240 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
|
|
|
4241 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4242 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000
|
|
|
4243 \endgroup}
|
|
|
4244
|
|
|
4245 % This definition is run if you use @defvarx
|
|
|
4246 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
|
|
|
4247
|
|
|
4248 \def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4249 \def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4250 \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4251 \def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4252 \def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4253
|
|
|
4254 % Now define @deftp
|
|
|
4255 % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
|
|
|
4256
|
|
|
4257 \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
|
|
|
4258
|
|
|
4259 % @deftp Class window height width ...
|
|
|
4260
|
|
|
4261 \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
|
|
|
4262
|
|
|
4263 \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
|
4264 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
|
|
4265
|
|
|
4266 % This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
|
|
|
4267 % anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
|
|
|
4268
|
|
|
4269 \def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4270
|
|
108
|
4271
|
|
0
|
4272 \message{cross reference,}
|
|
|
4273 % Define cross-reference macros
|
|
|
4274 \newwrite \auxfile
|
|
|
4275
|
|
|
4276 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
|
|
4277 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
|
|
4278
|
|
108
|
4279 % @inforef is simple.
|
|
|
4280 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
|
|
4281 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
|
|
4282 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
|
|
4283
|
|
0
|
4284 % \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo.
|
|
|
4285
|
|
|
4286 \def\setref#1{%
|
|
|
4287 \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
|
|
|
4288 \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
|
|
|
4289 \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}}
|
|
|
4290
|
|
|
4291 \def\unnumbsetref#1{%
|
|
|
4292 \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
|
|
|
4293 \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
|
|
|
4294 \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}}
|
|
|
4295
|
|
|
4296 \def\appendixsetref#1{%
|
|
|
4297 \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
|
|
|
4298 \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
|
|
|
4299 \dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}}
|
|
|
4300
|
|
|
4301 % \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points.
|
|
|
4302 % For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info
|
|
|
4303 % cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info
|
|
|
4304 % file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be
|
|
|
4305 % omitted.
|
|
|
4306 %
|
|
|
4307 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
|
4308 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
|
4309 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
|
4310 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
|
|
4311 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
|
|
4312 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|
|
4313 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
|
|
|
4314 \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
|
|
|
4315 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
|
|
4316 % No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
|
108
|
4317 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
4318 % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
|
|
4319 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
|
4320 \else
|
|
0
|
4321 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
|
|
4322 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
|
|
4323 \ifdim \wd1>0pt%
|
|
|
4324 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
|
|
4325 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
|
4326 \else
|
|
|
4327 \ifhavexrefs
|
|
|
4328 % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
|
108
|
4329 \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
|
0
|
4330 \else
|
|
|
4331 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
|
|
4332 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
|
4333 \fi%
|
|
|
4334 \fi
|
|
|
4335 \fi
|
|
|
4336 \fi
|
|
|
4337 %
|
|
|
4338 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
|
|
4339 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
|
|
4340 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
|
|
4341 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
|
|
4342 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
|
|
4343 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
|
|
4344 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|
|
4345 \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
|
|
4346 \else
|
|
|
4347 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
|
|
4348 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
|
|
4349 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
|
|
4350 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
|
|
4351 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
|
|
4352 {\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
|
|
4353 \space [\printednodename],\space
|
|
|
4354 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
|
|
4355 \fi
|
|
|
4356 \endgroup}
|
|
|
4357
|
|
|
4358 % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
|
|
|
4359
|
|
|
4360 % Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
|
|
|
4361 % work in node names.
|
|
175
|
4362 \def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive
|
|
0
|
4363 \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}%
|
|
|
4364 \next}}
|
|
|
4365
|
|
|
4366 % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
|
|
|
4367 % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
|
|
|
4368 % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
|
|
|
4369
|
|
|
4370 \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
|
|
|
4371
|
|
|
4372 % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
|
|
|
4373
|
|
|
4374 \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
|
|
|
4375
|
|
|
4376 \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
|
|
|
4377
|
|
|
4378 \def\Ynothing{}
|
|
|
4379
|
|
|
4380 \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
|
|
|
4381 \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
|
|
|
4382 \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
|
|
|
4383 \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
|
|
4384 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
|
|
4385 \else %
|
|
|
4386 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
|
|
4387 \fi \fi \fi }
|
|
|
4388
|
|
|
4389 \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
|
|
|
4390 \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
|
|
|
4391 \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
|
|
|
4392 \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
|
|
4393 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
|
|
4394 \else %
|
|
|
4395 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
|
|
4396 \fi \fi \fi }
|
|
|
4397
|
|
|
4398 \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
|
|
|
4399
|
|
|
4400 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
|
|
4401 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
|
|
4402 %
|
|
|
4403 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
|
|
4404 \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
|
|
|
4405 \else
|
|
|
4406 \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
|
|
4407 \fi
|
|
|
4408
|
|
|
4409 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
|
|
4410 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
|
|
4411
|
|
|
4412 \def\refx#1#2{%
|
|
|
4413 \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
4414 % If not defined, say something at least.
|
|
290
|
4415 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
|
0
|
4416 \ifhavexrefs
|
|
|
4417 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
|
|
4418 \else
|
|
|
4419 \ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
|
|
4420 \global\warnedxrefstrue
|
|
|
4421 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
|
|
4422 \fi
|
|
|
4423 \fi
|
|
|
4424 \else
|
|
|
4425 % It's defined, so just use it.
|
|
|
4426 \csname X#1\endcsname
|
|
|
4427 \fi
|
|
|
4428 #2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
|
|
4429 }
|
|
|
4430
|
|
175
|
4431 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
|
|
290
|
4432 %
|
|
|
4433 \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
|
|
|
4434 % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
|
|
|
4435 \catcode`\\ = 0
|
|
|
4436 \afterassignment\endgroup
|
|
|
4437 \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
|
|
|
4438 }
|
|
175
|
4439
|
|
70
|
4440 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
|
175
|
4441 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
|
|
|
4442 \catcode`\^^@=\other
|
|
|
4443 \catcode`\^^A=\other
|
|
|
4444 \catcode`\^^B=\other
|
|
|
4445 \catcode`\^^C=\other
|
|
|
4446 \catcode`\^^D=\other
|
|
|
4447 \catcode`\^^E=\other
|
|
|
4448 \catcode`\^^F=\other
|
|
|
4449 \catcode`\^^G=\other
|
|
|
4450 \catcode`\^^H=\other
|
|
|
4451 \catcode`\^^K=\other
|
|
|
4452 \catcode`\^^L=\other
|
|
|
4453 \catcode`\^^N=\other
|
|
|
4454 \catcode`\^^P=\other
|
|
|
4455 \catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
|
|
4456 \catcode`\^^R=\other
|
|
|
4457 \catcode`\^^S=\other
|
|
|
4458 \catcode`\^^T=\other
|
|
|
4459 \catcode`\^^U=\other
|
|
|
4460 \catcode`\^^V=\other
|
|
|
4461 \catcode`\^^W=\other
|
|
|
4462 \catcode`\^^X=\other
|
|
|
4463 \catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
|
|
4464 \catcode`\^^[=\other
|
|
|
4465 \catcode`\^^\=\other
|
|
|
4466 \catcode`\^^]=\other
|
|
|
4467 \catcode`\^^^=\other
|
|
|
4468 \catcode`\^^_=\other
|
|
|
4469 \catcode`\@=\other
|
|
|
4470 \catcode`\^=\other
|
|
|
4471 % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
|
|
4472 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
|
|
4473 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
|
|
4474 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
|
|
4475 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
|
|
4476 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
|
|
4477 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
|
|
4478 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
|
|
4479 %
|
|
|
4480 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
|
|
4481 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
|
|
4482 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
|
|
4483 %
|
|
|
4484 \catcode`\~=\other
|
|
|
4485 \catcode`\[=\other
|
|
|
4486 \catcode`\]=\other
|
|
|
4487 \catcode`\"=\other
|
|
|
4488 \catcode`\_=\other
|
|
|
4489 \catcode`\|=\other
|
|
|
4490 \catcode`\<=\other
|
|
|
4491 \catcode`\>=\other
|
|
|
4492 \catcode`\$=\other
|
|
|
4493 \catcode`\#=\other
|
|
|
4494 \catcode`\&=\other
|
|
|
4495 % `\+ does not work, so use 43.
|
|
|
4496 \catcode43=\other
|
|
|
4497 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
|
|
|
4498 {%
|
|
|
4499 \count 1=128
|
|
|
4500 \def\loop{%
|
|
|
4501 \catcode\count 1=\other
|
|
|
4502 \advance\count 1 by 1
|
|
|
4503 \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
|
|
|
4504 }%
|
|
0
|
4505 }%
|
|
175
|
4506 % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
|
|
|
4507 % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
|
|
|
4508 % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
|
|
|
4509 % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
|
|
|
4510 % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
|
|
|
4511 % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
|
|
|
4512 \catcode`\{=1
|
|
|
4513 \catcode`\}=2
|
|
|
4514 \catcode`\%=\other
|
|
|
4515 \catcode`\'=0
|
|
|
4516 \catcode`\\=\other
|
|
|
4517 %
|
|
|
4518 \openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
|
|
4519 \ifeof 1 \else
|
|
|
4520 \closein 1
|
|
|
4521 \input \jobname.aux
|
|
|
4522 \global\havexrefstrue
|
|
|
4523 \global\warnedobstrue
|
|
|
4524 \fi
|
|
|
4525 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
|
|
4526 \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
|
0
|
4527 \endgroup}
|
|
|
4528
|
|
|
4529
|
|
|
4530 % Footnotes.
|
|
|
4531
|
|
|
4532 \newcount \footnoteno
|
|
|
4533
|
|
|
4534 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
|
|
4535 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
|
|
4536 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
|
108
|
4537 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
|
|
4538 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
|
0
|
4539 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
|
|
4540
|
|
175
|
4541 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
|
0
|
4542 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
|
|
4543
|
|
|
4544 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
|
|
4545
|
|
|
4546 {\catcode `\@=11
|
|
|
4547 %
|
|
|
4548 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
|
|
4549 \gdef\footnote{%
|
|
|
4550 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
|
|
4551 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
|
|
4552 %
|
|
|
4553 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
|
|
4554 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
|
|
4555 \let\@sf\empty
|
|
|
4556 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
|
|
|
4557 %
|
|
|
4558 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
|
|
4559 \unskip
|
|
|
4560 \thisfootno\@sf
|
|
|
4561 \footnotezzz
|
|
|
4562 }%
|
|
|
4563
|
|
|
4564 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
|
|
4565 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
|
|
4566 %
|
|
175
|
4567 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
|
|
|
4568 % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
|
|
4569 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
|
|
4570 %
|
|
|
4571 \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
|
|
0
|
4572 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
|
|
4573 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
|
|
4574 % So reset some parameters.
|
|
|
4575 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
|
|
4576 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
|
|
4577 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
|
|
4578 \floatingpenalty\@MM
|
|
|
4579 \leftskip\z@skip
|
|
|
4580 \rightskip\z@skip
|
|
|
4581 \spaceskip\z@skip
|
|
|
4582 \xspaceskip\z@skip
|
|
|
4583 \parindent\defaultparindent
|
|
|
4584 %
|
|
|
4585 % Hang the footnote text off the number.
|
|
|
4586 \hang
|
|
|
4587 \textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
|
|
4588 %
|
|
|
4589 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
|
|
4590 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
|
|
4591 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
|
|
4592 \footstrut
|
|
175
|
4593 \futurelet\next\fo@t
|
|
0
|
4594 }
|
|
175
|
4595 \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
|
|
|
4596 \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
|
|
|
4597 \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
|
|
|
4598 \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
|
|
|
4599 \def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
|
|
0
|
4600
|
|
|
4601 }%end \catcode `\@=11
|
|
|
4602
|
|
|
4603 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
|
|
4604 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
|
|
4605 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
|
|
4606 %
|
|
|
4607 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
|
|
4608 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
|
|
4609 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
|
|
4610 %
|
|
|
4611 \def\setleading#1{%
|
|
|
4612 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
|
|
|
4613 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
|
|
4614 \normalbaselines
|
|
|
4615 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
|
|
4616 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
|
|
4617 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
|
|
4618 }%
|
|
|
4619 }
|
|
|
4620
|
|
|
4621 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
|
|
4622 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
|
|
4623 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
|
|
4624 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
|
|
4625 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
|
|
4626 %
|
|
|
4627 \def\|{%
|
|
|
4628 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
|
|
4629 \leavevmode
|
|
|
4630 %
|
|
|
4631 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
|
|
4632 \vadjust{%
|
|
|
4633 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
|
|
4634 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
|
|
4635 \vskip-\baselineskip
|
|
|
4636 %
|
|
|
4637 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
|
|
4638 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
|
|
4639 \llap{%
|
|
|
4640 %
|
|
|
4641 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
|
|
4642 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
|
|
4643 %
|
|
|
4644 % This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
|
|
4645 \hskip 12pt
|
|
|
4646 }%
|
|
|
4647 }%
|
|
|
4648 }
|
|
|
4649
|
|
|
4650 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
|
|
4651 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
|
|
4652 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
|
|
4653 %
|
|
|
4654 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
|
|
4655
|
|
175
|
4656 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
|
|
4657 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
|
|
4658 %
|
|
|
4659 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
|
|
4660 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
|
|
4661 % undone and the next image would fail.
|
|
290
|
4662 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
|
175
|
4663 \ifeof 1 \else
|
|
|
4664 \closein 1
|
|
|
4665 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% do not bother showing banner
|
|
|
4666 \input epsf.tex
|
|
|
4667 \fi
|
|
|
4668 %
|
|
|
4669 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
|
|
4670 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
|
|
4671 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
|
|
4672 it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
|
|
4673 %
|
|
|
4674 % Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
|
|
4675 \def\image#1{%
|
|
|
4676 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
|
|
4677 \ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
|
|
4678 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
|
|
4679 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
|
|
4680 \global\warnednoepsftrue
|
|
|
4681 \fi
|
|
|
4682 \else
|
|
|
4683 \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
|
|
|
4684 \fi
|
|
|
4685 }
|
|
|
4686 %
|
|
|
4687 % Arguments to @image:
|
|
|
4688 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
|
|
4689 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
|
|
4690 % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
|
|
4691 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
|
|
4692 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
|
|
4693 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|
|
4694 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
|
|
4695 \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
|
|
4696 }
|
|
0
|
4697
|
|
|
4698 % End of control word definitions.
|
|
|
4699
|
|
175
|
4700
|
|
0
|
4701 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
|
|
4702
|
|
|
4703 \def\openindices{%
|
|
|
4704 \newindex{cp}%
|
|
|
4705 \newcodeindex{fn}%
|
|
|
4706 \newcodeindex{vr}%
|
|
|
4707 \newcodeindex{tp}%
|
|
|
4708 \newcodeindex{ky}%
|
|
|
4709 \newcodeindex{pg}%
|
|
|
4710 }
|
|
|
4711
|
|
|
4712 % Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format.
|
|
|
4713
|
|
108
|
4714 \hsize = 6in
|
|
|
4715 \hoffset = .25in
|
|
0
|
4716 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
|
|
4717 \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|
108
|
4718 \parskip 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
|
4719 \setleading{13.2pt}
|
|
0
|
4720 \advance\topskip by 1.2cm
|
|
|
4721
|
|
108
|
4722 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
4723 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
4724 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
4725
|
|
0
|
4726 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
|
|
4727 \vbadness=10000
|
|
|
4728
|
|
|
4729 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
|
|
|
4730 \widowpenalty=10000
|
|
|
4731 \clubpenalty=10000
|
|
|
4732
|
|
|
4733 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
|
|
4734 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
|
|
4735 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
|
|
4736 % \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format.
|
|
|
4737 %
|
|
|
4738 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
|
|
4739 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
|
|
4740 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
|
|
4741 \else
|
|
|
4742 \emergencystretch = \hsize
|
|
|
4743 \divide\emergencystretch by 45
|
|
|
4744 \fi
|
|
|
4745
|
|
|
4746 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25)
|
|
|
4747 \def\smallbook{
|
|
108
|
4748 \global\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
4749 \global\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
4750 \global\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
4751 %
|
|
|
4752 \global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
|
|
4753 \setleading{12pt}
|
|
|
4754 \advance\topskip by -1cm
|
|
|
4755 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
|
|
|
4756 \global\hsize = 5in
|
|
|
4757 \global\vsize=7.5in
|
|
|
4758 \global\tolerance=700
|
|
|
4759 \global\hfuzz=1pt
|
|
|
4760 \global\contentsrightmargin=0pt
|
|
|
4761 \global\deftypemargin=0pt
|
|
|
4762 \global\defbodyindent=.5cm
|
|
|
4763 %
|
|
|
4764 \global\pagewidth=\hsize
|
|
|
4765 \global\pageheight=\vsize
|
|
|
4766 %
|
|
|
4767 \global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx
|
|
|
4768 \global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx
|
|
|
4769 \global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp}
|
|
0
|
4770 }
|
|
|
4771
|
|
|
4772 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
|
|
4773 \def\afourpaper{
|
|
|
4774 \global\tolerance=700
|
|
|
4775 \global\hfuzz=1pt
|
|
|
4776 \setleading{12pt}
|
|
|
4777 \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
|
|
|
4778
|
|
|
4779 \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip
|
|
|
4780 \advance\vsize by \topskip
|
|
|
4781 %\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt
|
|
|
4782 \global\hsize= 6.5in
|
|
|
4783 \global\outerhsize=\hsize
|
|
|
4784 \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
|
|
4785 \global\outervsize=\vsize
|
|
|
4786 \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
|
|
|
4787
|
|
|
4788 \global\pagewidth=\hsize
|
|
|
4789 \global\pageheight=\vsize
|
|
|
4790 }
|
|
|
4791
|
|
108
|
4792 \bindingoffset=0pt
|
|
|
4793 \normaloffset=\hoffset
|
|
|
4794 \pagewidth=\hsize
|
|
|
4795 \pageheight=\vsize
|
|
|
4796
|
|
0
|
4797 % Allow control of the text dimensions. Parameters in order: textheight;
|
|
108
|
4798 % textwidth; voffset; hoffset; binding offset; topskip.
|
|
|
4799 % All require a dimension;
|
|
0
|
4800 % header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page.
|
|
|
4801
|
|
108
|
4802 \def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{
|
|
0
|
4803 \global\vsize= #1
|
|
108
|
4804 \global\topskip= #6
|
|
0
|
4805 \advance\vsize by \topskip
|
|
|
4806 \global\voffset= #3
|
|
|
4807 \global\hsize= #2
|
|
|
4808 \global\outerhsize=\hsize
|
|
|
4809 \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
|
|
4810 \global\outervsize=\vsize
|
|
|
4811 \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
|
|
|
4812 \global\pagewidth=\hsize
|
|
|
4813 \global\pageheight=\vsize
|
|
|
4814 \global\normaloffset= #4
|
|
|
4815 \global\bindingoffset= #5}
|
|
|
4816
|
|
108
|
4817 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
|
|
|
4818 % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
|
|
|
4819 \def\afourlatex
|
|
|
4820 {\global\tolerance=700
|
|
|
4821 \global\hfuzz=1pt
|
|
|
4822 \setleading{12pt}
|
|
|
4823 \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
|
|
|
4824 \advance\baselineskip by 1.6pt
|
|
|
4825 \changepagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}
|
|
|
4826 }
|
|
0
|
4827
|
|
|
4828 % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
|
|
|
4829 \def\afourwide{\afourpaper
|
|
108
|
4830 \changepagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}}
|
|
0
|
4831
|
|
|
4832 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
|
|
4833 \catcode`\"=\other
|
|
|
4834 \catcode`\~=\other
|
|
|
4835 \catcode`\^=\other
|
|
|
4836 \catcode`\_=\other
|
|
|
4837 \catcode`\|=\other
|
|
|
4838 \catcode`\<=\other
|
|
|
4839 \catcode`\>=\other
|
|
|
4840 \catcode`\+=\other
|
|
|
4841 \def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
|
|
4842 \def\normaltilde{~}
|
|
|
4843 \def\normalcaret{^}
|
|
|
4844 \def\normalunderscore{_}
|
|
|
4845 \def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
|
|
4846 \def\normalless{<}
|
|
|
4847 \def\normalgreater{>}
|
|
|
4848 \def\normalplus{+}
|
|
|
4849
|
|
|
4850 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
|
|
|
4851 % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
|
|
|
4852 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
|
|
4853 %
|
|
|
4854 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
|
|
4855 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
|
|
4856 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
|
|
4857 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
|
|
4858 %
|
|
|
4859 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|
|
4860
|
|
|
4861 % Turn off all special characters except @
|
|
|
4862 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
|
|
4863 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
|
|
4864 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
|
|
4865
|
|
|
4866 \catcode`\"=\active
|
|
|
4867 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}}
|
|
|
4868 \let"=\activedoublequote
|
|
|
4869 \catcode`\~=\active
|
|
|
4870 \def~{{\tt \char '176}}
|
|
|
4871 \chardef\hat=`\^
|
|
|
4872 \catcode`\^=\active
|
|
|
4873 \def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
|
|
4874
|
|
|
4875 \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
|
4876 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
|
|
4877 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
|
108
|
4878 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
|
|
0
|
4879
|
|
|
4880 \catcode`\|=\active
|
|
|
4881 \def|{{\tt \char '174}}
|
|
|
4882 \chardef \less=`\<
|
|
|
4883 \catcode`\<=\active
|
|
|
4884 \def<{{\tt \less}}
|
|
|
4885 \chardef \gtr=`\>
|
|
|
4886 \catcode`\>=\active
|
|
|
4887 \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
|
|
4888 \catcode`\+=\active
|
|
|
4889 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
|
|
4890 %\catcode 27=\active
|
|
|
4891 %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
|
|
|
4892
|
|
|
4893 % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
|
|
|
4894 {\catcode`\==\active
|
|
|
4895 \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
|
|
|
4896
|
|
|
4897 \catcode`+=\active
|
|
|
4898 \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
|
4899
|
|
|
4900 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
|
|
4901 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
|
|
4902 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
|
|
4903 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
|
|
4904 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
|
|
4905
|
|
|
4906 \catcode`\@=0
|
|
|
4907
|
|
|
4908 % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
|
|
|
4909 \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
|
|
|
4910 %{\catcode`\\=\other
|
|
|
4911 %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
|
|
|
4912
|
|
|
4913 % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
|
|
|
4914 {\catcode`\\=\active
|
|
|
4915 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
|
|
|
4916
|
|
|
4917 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
|
|
|
4918 \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
|
|
|
4919
|
|
|
4920 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
|
|
4921 \escapechar=`\@
|
|
|
4922
|
|
|
4923 % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
|
|
|
4924 \catcode`\\=\active
|
|
|
4925
|
|
|
4926 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
|
|
|
4927 % even after parsing them.
|
|
|
4928 @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
|
|
4929 @let\=@realbackslash
|
|
|
4930 @let~=@normaltilde
|
|
|
4931 @let^=@normalcaret
|
|
|
4932 @let_=@normalunderscore
|
|
|
4933 @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
|
|
4934 @let<=@normalless
|
|
|
4935 @let>=@normalgreater
|
|
|
4936 @let+=@normalplus}
|
|
|
4937
|
|
|
4938 @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
|
|
4939 @let\=@normalbackslash
|
|
|
4940 @let~=@normaltilde
|
|
|
4941 @let^=@normalcaret
|
|
|
4942 @let_=@normalunderscore
|
|
|
4943 @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
|
|
4944 @let<=@normalless
|
|
|
4945 @let>=@normalgreater
|
|
|
4946 @let+=@normalplus}
|
|
|
4947
|
|
|
4948 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
|
|
4949 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
|
|
4950 @otherifyactive
|
|
|
4951
|
|
|
4952 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
|
|
4953 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
|
|
4954 % a backslash.
|
|
|
4955 %
|
|
|
4956 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
|
|
4957 @global@let\ = @eatinput
|
|
|
4958
|
|
|
4959 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
|
|
4960 % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
|
|
4961 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
|
|
4962 % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
|
|
|
4963 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
|
|
4964 %
|
|
|
4965 @gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
|
|
4966 @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
|
|
|
4967
|
|
|
4968 %% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below
|
|
|
4969 %% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
|
|
|
4970 @catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
|
|
|
4971
|
|
|
4972 @textfonts
|
|
|
4973 @rm
|
|
|
4974
|
|
|
4975 @c Local variables:
|
|
|
4976 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
|
|
4977 @c End:
|
